Assa Abloy Avolution S series Installation & Programming Manual

‘S series’
(8/16 Zone Control Communicator)
Installation &
Programming Guide
Proudly Designed and Manufactured in New Zealand (NZS:4301/93)
Security Merchants Australia P/L
VIC 03 9558 8455 NSW 02 9890 5300 QLD 07 3552 5966 SA 08 8297 5555
WA 08 9240 7500 National Technical Support Contact 1300 655 076
An ASSA ABLOY Group Company
Copyright by Security Merchants Australia Pty Ltd
This manual relates to the
‘S series’ alarm control panel software version V9.00 to V9.05.
Disclaimer
Security Merchants Australia Pty Ltd makes no warranties regarding the content of this document and assumes no
responsibility for any omissions or errors contained herein. To the best of our knowledge the information contained in this
manual is correct at the time of printing. Security Merchants Australia Pty Ltd reserves the right to make changes to the
features and specifications at any time without notice in the course of product development.
This
‘S series’ security alarm control panel has been designed to provide the most requested features for
both the installer & the end-user. These features include ease of installation, ease of programming and user friendly
operation, all in a package which is reliable, functional and attractive. Utilising many years of experience in the security
industry and implementing valuable feedback, we are proud to provide you with a new generation of alarm controller. The
‘S Series’ is a New Zealand designed and built product which brings you the quality and features which you deserve, at an
affordable price. In addition to the advanced design, only the highest quality components have been used in the
production of this Security panel to ensure the highest degree of reliability.
This manual will guide you through the installation and programming of your
‘S series’ alarm panel.
For additional information regarding the operating instructions and options, please refer to the
User Guide.
‘S series’
CONTENTS
Page No.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
6
Wiring to the Panel
6
INPUT
7
Examples of Zone Wiring Options
Other Inputs
8
9
Description of Outputs
9
Installing RX-16 Radio Receiver
Installing 90 Second Voice or DTMF Board
DTMF Board
Installing Proximity Reader
Proximity Readers
Night Monitor Keypad
10
10
10
11
12
13
AVOLUTION ‘S series’ 16 Zone LED Keypad
AVOLUTION ‘S series’ LCD Keypad
14
15
OUTPUTS
9
ACCESSORIES
10
KEYPAD INDICATIONS
14
KEYPAD MEMORY DISPLAY
16
LED Keypad View Memory Mode
LCD Keypad View Memory Mode
KEYPAD INSTALLATION
16
18
19
Keypad Address Assignment
LCD Keypad Adjustment
19
21
LCD KEYPAD “LOCAL EDIT” PROGRAM MODE
22
Accessing Local Program Mode
Local Edit Mode Direct Program Address
LCD Keypad ‘Local Edit’ Mode Menu Programming
Changing the Area Single Character Identifier
Changing the Zone Names
Changing the Keypad Area Name
Changing the Keypad Name
Changing the User Names
Changing the Output Names
Resetting Individual Text to Default or Last Saved Setting
Resetting All Text to Default
Copying Text to Another LCD Keypad
Exiting Local Edit Program Mode
ACCESSING PROGRAM MODE
22
22
23
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
28
How to Program Using LED Keypads
Access to Programming on Power Up (Installer Mode)
Access to Installer Program Mode from Run Mode
Access to Client Program Mode from Run Mode
Resetting Back to Factory Default Settings (From Installer Mode Only)
To Exit Program Modes Using LED Keypad
To Exit Program Modes Using LCD Keypad
How to Program Using LCD Keypads
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
LCD Keypad Menu Programming
LCD Keypad Program Menu Flowchart
LCD Main Menu Headings
LCD Keypad Main & Sub-Menu Program Chart
30
32
33
34
LCD PROGRAM MENUS
30
SPECIAL KEYPAD FUNCTIONS
37
Special Keypad Operating Features
37
User Codes Type
User Areas
User Code Access Options
User Code Privileges
Radio User Type
Radio User Privileges
Time Zone Assigned to a User
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
Radio Pendant Panic Beeps to Keypad
User to Output Mask
42
42
USERS PROGRAMMING
38
User to Keypad assignment
42
3
CONTENTS
cont.
User can turn an Output On/Off
Radio Pendant Panic Alarm to Output
Learn/Delete/ Find Radio Pendant Codes
Learn/Delete/Find Access Tag/Card Codes/Location
MISCELLANEOUS PANEL & CLOCK SETTINGS
42
43
43
44
44
Installer Code
Duress Digit
Dial Report Delay
Radio Zone Supervised Timer
Two Trigger Time
Mains Fail Report Delay
Receiver Fail Timer
Upload/download Site Code Number
Temporary Output Disable
Miscellaneous Panel Options
Installer Options
User Options
Setting Time, Date & Daylight Saving
44
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
Output Options: A/B/C/D
Output On Delay, Pulse, Reset & Chime Times
Start of ‘DTMF Output Control’ Status Message
Un-Map an Output
Assigning a Time Zone to an Output
49
51
52
52
52
Area Options A/B
Area Arm/Stay Arm/Disarm indication to Outputs
Pendant Arm/Disarm/Stay Mode Arm/Disarm Chirp to Output
Arm/Disarm/Stay Mode Arm/Disarm Pulse to Output
Armed/Stay Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad
Monitoring Account Code Number
Remote Arm/Disarm DTMF Code & Start Voice Message
Armed/Stay Mode Arm Exit Beeps to Output
Area Delinquency Time
Auto-Arm/Disarm Time-zone
52
53
54
55
56
56
56
57
58
58
Keypad Area Assignment
Keypad Button Options
Keypad System Beeps & LED Options
Keypad “ARM”, “STAY”, “A” & “B” Button Options
Keypad “CONTROL” Button to Output Mask
Keypad “Panic” “Fire” “Medical” & “Duress” “Tamper Switch” “Wrong Code
Manual Panic/Fire/Medical/Wrong Code or Keypad Tamper Alarm Beeps to Keypad
Chime Alarm Keypad Beep Time
Proximity Reader LED to Output Mapping
Learn Proximity Reader Keypad Address Number
58
59
59
60
63
65
65
65
66
66
Key-switch Area Assignment
Key-switch Access & Operational Options
66
67
Zone Area Assignment
Zone Options A/B/C
Zone EOL Options
Zone Response Time
Radio Zone Detector Type
Zone Alarms to Output
Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypad
Armed & Stay Mode Entry Delay Times
Zone Re-Trigger Count
Zone Near/Confirmed Contact ID Report Code
Zone Alarm Voice Message Number
Armed/Stay Mode Entry Delay to Output, Sensor –Watch Time
Learn/Delete/Find Radio Zone Codes
67
67
70
70
71
72
73
74
75
75
75
75
76
Time-Zone Days
Time-Zone Start & Stop Times
77
77
OUTPUTS
49
AREAS
52
KEYPADS
58
KEY-SWITCHES
66
ZONES
67
TIME-ZONES
77
4
CONTENTS
DIALLER
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
cont.
Telephone Numbers
78
78
89
89
80
80
80
81
81
82
82
82
Telephone Number Report Formats
Telephone Number Report Options
Maximum Dial Re-Tries per Telephone Number
Dialler Reporting Options A/B/C/D
Call Divert Trigger Events
Divert Number Dial Options
Divert Number
82
83
84
84
86
87
87
Dialler Options
Auto Answer Ring Count
Test Call Start Time & Period
Keypad Listen-In Options
Dialling Pre-Fix Number
Alarm Contact ID Report Code: Panic/Fire/Medical
Output Control/Microphone On/Off DTMF Code Number
Dialler Acknowledge / Force Test Call DTMF Code Number
Miscellaneous Voice Board Report Messages
MISCELLANEOUS 4+2 CODES
88
Mains/Battery/Tamper/Duress & Arming 4+2 Codes
SIA ALARM REPORT CODES
88
90
Zone/Panic/Fire/Medical Alarm SIA Reporting Codes
PANEL DIAGNOSTIC & DEFAULT OPTIONS
90
90
Panel Software Version Number
Keypad Address Number
Areas Assigned to the Keypad
Display Time Zones Currently Active
Display Battery Voltage
Walk Test Mode
Write/Read to EEPROM (DTU) Board
Default Codes & Telephone Numbers
Default All Programming to Factory Settings
Clear Alarm Memory Buffer
Initiate a Call to the Call Back Number
Read RSSI from Pendants and Wireless Zones
PROGRAM SUMMARY GUIDE
90
90
90
90
90
91
91
92
92
92
92
92
93
Program Summary Guide
Users
Miscellaneous Panel & Clock Settings
Outputs
Areas
Keypads
Keypad Switches
Zones
Time Zones
Dialler
Telephone Numbers
Miscellaneous 4+2 Program Options
SIA Alarm Report Codes
Panel Diagnostic Default Options
AVOLUTION ’ S SERIES’ LED KEYPAD IMAGE
AVOLUTION ’S SERIES’ QUICK START GUIDE
USER PRIVILEGES CHART
TELECOM INTERFACE
CONTACT ID REPORTING CODE SUMMARY
SIA REPORTING CODE SUMMARY
SETTING UP AND OPERATION OF THE FULL DUPLEX TWO WAY VOICE FUNCTION
5
93
93
95
96
97
99
102
102
106
107
108
109
110
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
WIRING TO THE PANEL
Heatsink
Line
In
In
Line
Phone
Out
230V
AC
Input
Mains
Earth
V9
AC
Out
17V
TELECOM
EXPANSION
AC
RST
RESETTING THE PANEL
Power-up the panel with the tamper input in
alarm while shorting out “RST” pins for 5 seconds
(you must short out the “RST” pins before the
panel LED starts to flash).
Lin
Dat
Neg
Pos
Blk
NO
This will default: User Codes, Telephone Numbers,
Installer Code & Account Codes.
It will also Disarm All Armed Areas.
NC
The Reset feature is disabled if Installer Lockout is
turned on.
C
12V
Battery
Link 1
12V
1
C
2
3
C
4
5
C
6
7
C
8
Tmp
Gnd
12V
2k2
Gnd
2k2
4
2k2
2
3
Outputs
2k2
1
2k2
12V
2k2
Gnd
+
_
Clk
Red
Gnd
OUTPUT 4
RELAY
CONTACTS
ZONE 8
12v
0v
2k2
2k2
N/C
Com
Tmp
Tmp
12v
0v
Optional Listen-in Keypad Connection
Latching Smoke Detector /
Normally Open Contacts
+
_
Passive Infra-Red
Detector
ZONE 1
Internal Alarm-Piezo
+
_
Gnd
Data
+
_
Ant
Clock
2k2
LED Keypad
Neg
Pos
RX-16/303
Receiver
External Alarm
6
INPUTS
The
‘S series’ has 9 separate programmable monitored analogue inputs,
8x
1x
Programmable, multi-state detection inputs which include Zone Doubling options
Programmable tamper input ( with optional Key-switch functions)
Each input must be terminated with the appropriate value or combination of end-of-line resistors, even if the input is
unused.
ZONE INPUTS - Each of the 8 zone inputs can be assigned one of the following End of Line (EOL) configuration options,
Zone EOL Type (P125E)
Input Resistor
Comments
0
(Short circuit)
Loop EOL
1
1k (Brown, Black, Red)
Single EOL
2
1k5 (Brown, Green, Red)
Single EOL
3
2k2 (Red, Red, Red)
Single EOL
4
3k3 (Orange, Orange, Red)
Single EOL
5
3k9 (Orange, White, Red)
Single EOL
6
4k7 (Yellow, Violet, Red)
Single EOL
7
5k6 (Green, Blue, Red)
Single EOL
8
6k8 (Blue, Grey, Red)
Single EOL
9
10k (Brown, Black, Orange)
Single EOL
10
12k (Brown, Red, Orange)
Single EOL
11
22k (Red, Red, Orange)
Single EOL
12
2k2 Tamper, 4k7 Zone
Zone & Tamper
13
3k3 Tamper, 6k8 Zone
Zone & Tamper
14
2k2 Tamper, 4k7 Low Zone, 8k2 High Zone
Zone Doubling, with Tamper
15
4k7 Low Zone, 8k2 High Zone
Zone Doubling, No tamper
Type 1-11 (Single EOL no Tamper)
Type 0 (Short/Loop Circuit)
n/c
n/c
n/o
Type 14 (Zone Doubling with Tamper)
Type 12-13 (Single Zone with Tamper)
Tamper Resistor
2k2 or 3k3
EOL Resistor
Alarm Contact
n/c or n/o
Alarm or Key-sw itch 1 Contact
NC or NO
4k7
4k7 or 6k8
7
Tamper
Alarm or Key-sw itch 2 Contact
NC or NO
8k2
Tamper
2k2
EXAMPLES OF ZONE WIRING OPTIONS
Short circuit loop, No EOL
2k2 EOL, No Tamper
N/C
N/O
N/C
Zone
Zone
0V
0V
2k2
Type 12 Configuration. Alarm & Tamper monitoring (contacts can be N/C or N/O)
N/C or N/O
Zone
2k2
4k7
Tamper Resistor
Zone Resistor
0V
Type 15 Configuration. Zone Doubling, NO Tamper (contacts can be N/C or N/O)
N/C or N/O
Zone
N/C or N/O
4k7
8k2
Lo-Zone Resistor
Hi-Zone Resistor
0V
Wiring a PIR Detector (N/C) for Alarm & Tamper Monitoring
Alarm
0V
Alarm Contact (N/C)
4k7
Alarm
2k2
Tamp
Zone
Tamper Contact (N/C)
Tamp
0V
0V
12V
+12V
PIR Internal Connections
Wiring a Smoke Detector (N/O) for Alarm & Tamper Monitoring
Alarm
Alarm
2k2
0V
Zone
0V
12V
Alarm Contact (N/O)
4k7
+12V
Smoke Alarm Internal Connections
8
OTHER INPUTS
TAMPER - A 24Hr tamper circuit is available for monitoring system tampers. This Tamper circuit is programmable as
either normally closed loop or 2k2 EOL supervision (the default is 2K2 EOL Supervision). Any Tamper alarms on this
input are mapped to alarm outputs in the same manner as for detection zones 1-16. Using Dual-End-of-Line resistors
(Refer to Zone Type 15 on Page 6) the Tamper input can also provide two key-switches. The Low key-switch (4k7
resistor) will be Key-switch 1 while the High key-switch (8k2 resistor) will be Key-switch 2.
In addition to the Zone & Tamper inputs, you will find the following additional inputs on the control PCB;
AC - Connect the 17VAC yellow wires (no polarity) from the transformer to the terminals marked AC on the PCB. The
panel includes a mains transformer rated at 1.4 amps at 17 VAC.
EARTH - Connect the mains earth to the appropriate terminal on the mains terminal block in the control box cabinet.
Also connect a lead from this earth point to the terminal marked with the Earth symbol (next to AC terminals) on the
panel PCB.
BATTERY - Connect a sealed lead acid rechargeable 12VDC battery to the terminals labelled red and black on the
control panel being careful to observe the correct polarity. The minimum recommended battery capacity is 7 amp
hours. Battery charge current at these terminals is limited to 300mA maximum. The battery connection is protected
against short circuits by a thermal fuse (F1). The panel performs a dynamic load test on the battery every 15 seconds
and if it fails the test at any time it will flash the Battery LED.
LINE IN - These terminals are used to connect the panel to the incoming telephone line. The dialler uses this line for
reporting alarm events. An ADSL filter will be required before the Line In terminals if ADSL is present in the building.
LINE OUT - These terminals are used to connect telephones and other communication equipment to the incoming
phone line via the panel dialler circuit. The telephone line is passed through the controller to ensure that the line is
available to the controller when it is required.
OUTPUTS
12 VOLT OUTPUTS - There are three 12VDC outputs on the panel PCB. These 12 volt outputs are regulated and Thermal
fuse protected against short circuits. The accessory outputs are marked 12V and 0V, while the keypad buss 12V supply is
labelled “POS” & “NEG”. The 12V outputs are supplied by thermal fuses F2 & F3. The recommended maximum total load
that should be drawn from all of the 12V outputs is 1A.
OUTPUTS 1 & 2 - These fully programmable, high current, open drain (high-going-low) type FET outputs capable of
switching up to 1.5A @ 12VDC. These 2 outputs are normally set as switched outputs, providing power for 12V sirens
or piezos. If required, these outputs can be programmed to be siren outputs designed to drive an 8 ohm 10 watt horn
speaker on each output (see P37E option 1). Also if a horn speaker is connected to Output #1 you may select (Refer to
P175E 7E program address) the listen-in feature to this output as well so that the dialling sequence can be heard at the
speaker.
OUTPUT 3&4 - These are low current, open collector (high-going-low) type transistor outputs capable of switching up
to 400mA. Like Outputs 1 & 2 they are fully programmable.
NOTE: - Connecting devices that draw current in excess of 400mA to outputs 3 or 4 will damage the output.
OUTPUT 4 Relay - This is a relay output (rated 1A@30VDC) that works in parallel with the transistor output with single
pole changeover contacts. If required, the Common (C) contact of the relay can be connected to either 12V or 0V via
Link 1. Like Outputs 1 & 2 it is fully programmable.
KEYPAD PORT - The terminals marked POS, NEG, CLOCK, & DATA make up the communications port which the keypads
and other intelligent field devices use to talk to the controller. The terminals are connected to corresponding terminals
on the remote devices. The "lin" terminal is only used by the keypads and utilises a fifth wire to provide a communicator
“listen-in” facility. This feature is particularly useful when servicing monitoring faults. The keypad 12V supply (POS,NEG)
is protected by fuse F3.
EXPANSION PORT - The expansion port allows connection of the RS232 serial board, 90 second Voice Board, DTMF
Board or EEPROM data transfer board (DTU). The serial board allows direct connection of a PC running the Upload/
Download software. The 90 second voice board allows voice messages to be programmed for monitoring purposes. The
Voice & DTMF boards allow Touchtone Code remote control via a telephone. The DTU allows for program “Cloning”
from one panel to another.
9
ACCESSORIES
INSTALLING RX-16 RADIO RECEIVER
The panel can have wireless capability via the
RX-16 receiver module. The receiver will add wireless
capability to your system in the form or wireless PIR detectors, Wireless Radio-key transmitters and wireless reed switch
transmitters. The RX-16 connects to the same communications port as the keypads. Multiple RX-16’s can be connected
to the panel to increase the coverage range if desired. The green LED fitted to the RX-16 receiver will flash at 1 second
intervals when in "Learn" mode (see P18E & P164E). The LED will also turn on when it is receiving an actual radio transmission (On Steady).
INSTALLING 90 SECOND VOICE or DTMF BOARD
The panel can also be fitted with a 90 second Voice Board or DTMF module. The Voice board stores either alarm event
messages for Voice dial monitoring and /or status messages for use with Command Control. The DTMF board provides
decoding of keypad numeric entries from a remote telephone. The panel Voice or DTMF Boards are installed directly onto
the motherboard via the "SERIAL" socket.
Installation procedure for the Voice or DTMF Board module is as follows.
1
Power-down the panel fully before starting the installation procedure.
2
Carefully plug the Voice or DTMF Board into the SERIAL socket (it will only fit in one direction).
3
Power-up the panel.
Speech message programming
Once you have installed the Voice Board you can record your personalised speech messages into the module with the
speech programmer (the programmer plugs onto the 10 way strip connector on the voice board, observe polarity with
the locating pin).
Before programming your voice messages you should work out a list of the messages you would like to be sent for each
alarm type and write them down in order, giving them a message number. These messages should then be recorded in
the same order they are written down so you know what the message number is when programming alarms to messages.
To record your messages once the programmer is installed, first press the reset button on the side of the Voice Board,
then hold the programmer about 10 cm away from the mouth and speak clearly at normal level into the microphone
while holding down the "REC" button. When you reach the end of your message release the REC button. (NOTE: Each individual message must be longer that 2 seconds duration). When recording your voice alarm message, you must ensure
that you clearly identify the origin of the call. You can play the message back through the programmer by first pressing
the reset button then by pressing the "PLAY" button momentarily. Because the panel can address many individual voice
messages you must store individual messages at what is known as recording slots within the Voice Board. These recording slots are recorded sequentially, one message starting where the other finishes. Every time you press and release
the REC button on the programmer, you create an end of message marker. These markers are used to define the recording slots within the Voice Board and can be of varying length according to each message duration.
To re-record your messages you must first press the "RESET" button on the speech module to get back to recording slot #
1. Once you are at slot # 1 you can re-record your messages in order as required.
NOTE: When recording multiple messages you only press the “RESET” button once at the beginning then record all messages sequentially as stated above. When you have finished recording all of your messages you can then press the “RESET”
button to allow play-back of the recording messages for verification purposes. When you have finished recording your
alarm messages, unplug the programmer and the process is complete. You must now go to the program addresses and
assign the individual messages to the specific functions.
DTMF BOARD
The panel has been supplied from the factory with the DTMF Decoder fitted to the main control board.
The DTMF Board does not have speech capability but does have a decoder to accurately decode the buttons from a
touchtone telephone. The DTMF board can allow remote Arm/Disarming and remote control of the outputs using 4 digit
codes. Instead of voice prompts the remote control features are enunciated by one long beep for OFF and three short
beeps for ON. For example, if you had a code of 1234 for area A remote Arm/Disarm (P63E1E) and you entered this code
at the remote telephone after the panel had answered the call, if Area A was currently Armed the panel would send 3
short beeps to indicate that it was Armed or On. By now pressing the <*> button on the telephone the panel will disarm
area A and return one long beep to indicate that it is now Disarmed or Off.
It will also allow alarms to be kissed off by a 4 digit code to secure the kiss-off procedure when in Domestic Alarm reporting format. If the on-board DTMF Decoder or the optional DTMF Board are fitted, you must use the <#>
button to kiss-off any Domestic Alarm reports. If a code is programmed at location P175E14E, you must use that code
10
followed by the <#> button to kiss-off the domestic alarm reports.
If you make a mistake when entering the kiss-off code, pressing the <#> button will clear all previous digits received at
the panel and you can now enter in the correct code.
INSTALLING PROXIMITY READER
There are three proximity readers that can be connected to the control panel. They are;
1-Arm Reader (Indoor Only)
2-Proximity only Access Reader Indoor / Outdoor)
3-Proximity and keypad (PIN) Access Reader Indoor / Outdoor
The ARM Reader is generally to be used for selective arming or disarming of either Area “A” or “B” or both. By presenting
a valid access tag or card to the reader the user can then arm or disarm the panel using the “A” & “B” buttons on the
reader. On presenting a valid tag to the reader, the current status of Areas A & B will be shown on the two LED’s. The
user has 4 seconds to make a new selection before the reader will timeout and the tag will have to be re-presented
again. The Areas allowed to be controlled by the user must be programmed by the installer. If the User is allowed to
fully Arm or arm Stay Mode then they can cycle through the various states (eg Disarmed, Full Armed, Stay Armed). As
the “A” or “B” button is pressed the associated LED will change to indicate the new state, eg if the Disarmed state was
selected the LED will be GREEN, If the Armed state was selected the LED will be RED and if Stay Mode was selected the
LED would be flashing RED. Four seconds after the last button was pressed the reader will action the new armed status
and the LED’s will turn off. If the reader has also been programmed to allow the “1& 3 PANIC” function at that keypad
number a “PANIC” alarm will be generated if the “A” & “B” buttons are pressed simultaneously (see P72E option 5).
NOTE: From the disarmed state you can select Armed or Stay modes but if already Armed or in Stay Mode you MUST
disarm first (letting the reader timeout) before you can select a new armed state.
The second reader is generally going to be used as an access control reader although if the tag is allowed to Arm/Disarm
the alarm then this will also happen when the tag is presented. For access control, if a tag or card is presented to the
reader the associated door lock will release via an output on the control panel. There is also an output at the reader
which can be used to unlock the door if desired (see drawing on following page for details). The output number at the
reader follows the keypad address number, eg if the reader has been assigned to keypad address 5, the output at the
reader will follow all programming associated with output 5.
The third reader is generally going to be used as an access control reader as well although if the tag is allowed to Arm/
Disarm the alarm then this will also happen when the tag is presented. This reader combines a proximity reader with a
full keypad. Depending on program options the reader can be set-up to operate on a proximity tag or card only, on entering of a valid user code only, or on presentation of the tag/card followed by the user code (PIN). If the presented tag
requires a PIN number to be entered, the LED on the reader will flash for 5 seconds after a valid tag to indicate that the
PIN number should now be entered. There is also an output available on this reader that follows the same addressing
functionality as described above.
If the two button “PANIC”, “FIRE” or “MEDICAL” functions are programmed to the keypad (see P72E Options 5,6 & 7)
these manual alarms can be generated at the reader by pressing “1” & “2” for “PANIC”, “3” & “4” for “FIRE” and “5” & “6”
for “MEDICAL” alarms.
On each of the three readers there is an optional input (see drawings on following page). This input is not EOL monitored so it should only be used for non-critical monitoring functions, eg monitoring an exterior gate to show if it is currently opened or closed. A zone can be programmed to use this input for its trigger (see P122E Option 4) so that the
state of the input can be displayed on a keypad. The inputs are linked to the selected keypad address programmed into
the reader. For example if the reader being used was programmed as keypad # 1, then the input can be assigned to
zone 1 or 9 (at location P122E), if the keypad address was # 8, the input can then be assigned to zone 8 or 16. Also, the
LED on reader types 2 & 3 can be linked to an output so that special functions may be displayed at the reader if desired
(see P98E). Each reader must have a unique keypad address number from 1-8 assigned so that the various program options can be assigned. This is explained in detail on Page 65.
NOTE: The proximity readers flash out the assigned keypad address number on the LED whenever the panel is in
“Installer Program” Mode. This allows quick identification of the assigned address for each reader.
11
PROXIMITY READERS
Control Panel
RED
A
B
0V
YELLOW
ORANGE
PANIC
12V
BLACK
N/O Input
WHITE
KP CLOCK
GREEN
DIODE
KP DATA
BROWN
BLUE
0V
Proximity Arming Reader
12V
Electric Lock
Lock Supply
12V
0V
Control Panel
RED
12V
BLACK
0V
YELLOW
ORANGE
N/O Input
WHITE
KP CLOCK
GREEN
DIODE
KP DATA
BROWN
BLUE
0V
Proximity Reader Only
12V
Electric Lock
Lock Supply
12V
0V
Control Panel
1
2
RED
12V
BLACK
3
4
ORANGE
5
6
7
8
9
0
0V
YELLOW
N/O Input
WHITE
GREEN
KP CLOCK
DIODE
BLUE
0V
#
*
KP DATA
BROWN
Proximity & PIN Reader
12V
Electric Lock
Lock Supply
12V
0V
12
NIGHT MONITOR KEYPAD
The Night Monitor Keypad is designed to be a simple night arming station typically used in a bedroom situation.
By pressing either of the <Night Monitor> buttons the alarm Stay Mode can be armed or disarmed. If both buttons are
pressed simultaneously, a Panic Alarm can be generated. A 4 way DIP switch on the rear of the unit sets various options.
The DIP switch functions and the programming requirements are detailed below.
READY
POS
ARMED
PANIC
NEG
CLK
DAT
Night
Monitor
ABC
Night
Monitor
ON
1 2 3 4
Front View
Rear View
The Night Monitor keypad can be set to keypad addresses 5-8 by using Switches 1 & 2. Refer to chart below.
DIP Switch â
1
2
KP No: 5
OFF
OFF
KP No: 6
ON
OFF
KP No: 7
OFF
ON
KP No: 8
ON
ON
Switch 3 is unused on the
panels.
‘S series’. It is used to force the armed LED to follow area A or B on other control
Switch 4 MUST be OFF (if Switch 4 is ON the unit will work with earlier version 4 & 5 control panels).
Night Monitor Panel Programming
The Night Monitor button is designed to arm or disarm Stay Mode. The Stay Mode Area is assigned to the keypad at location P76E. The functions of the button are programmed at location P77E (eg for the button to Arm Stay Mode and be able
to Disarm Stay Mode at all times you must have options 2 & 4 ON).
The “ARMED” LED function is programmed at location P71E. For example if the Night Monitor keypad is only assigned to
area A and you only want the Armed LED to show the status of area A you should turn on Option 1 (Area A) at location
P71E for the address assigned to the Night Monitor keypad.
If both Night Monitor buttons are pressed simultaneously, it is possible to generate a “PANIC” alarm. To enable the panic
alarm function for the keypad number assigned you must have option 3 turned on at location P72E.
13
KEYPAD INDICATIONS
‘S series’ 16 ZONE LED KEYPAD
1
5
9
13
Ready
Mains
2
6
10
14
Memory
Battery
3
7
11
15
Bypass
Tro ub le
ELITE S
4
8
12
16
Program
Line
ARMED
A
B
C
D
Aux (0 )
Contro l
Standard
S series Keypad Window Layout
When the Panel is displaying codes and address values in program mode it may be necessary to display the 0
digit. As there is no Zone indicator for 0 the "AUX (0)" indicator is used to show the number “0”.
FOR
‘S series’ LED KEYPAD INFORMATION SEE PAGE 112
The Chart below gives details on the various indicators on the LED keypad and what they mean.
LIGHT\INDICATION
OFF
ON STEADY
FLASHING
READY
Zone Unsealed
All Zones Sealed
-
MEMORY
Normal
Memory Display Mode
New Memory Event
BYPASS
Bypass Off
Zone Bypass Mode Active
Zone/s Bypassed
PROGRAM
Run Mode
Client Program Mode
Installer Program Mode or
Control Function Active
AUX (0)
Chime Mode ON
Chime Mode OFF
-
MAINS
-
Mains (AC) OK
Mains (AC) Fail
BATTERY
-
Battery OK
Battery Low
TROUBLE
Normal
Trouble (Tamper) Alarm
Active
New Trouble (Tamper) Alarm
LINE
Telephone line is OK
Dialler is currently making a
call
The Telephone line has been
cut or the call was not
completed
CONTROL
Control Function Off
Control Mode On
ZONES 1-16
Zone Secure
Zone Unsealed (Not Ready)
Zone in Alarm
ARMED A
Partition A Disarmed
Partition A Armed
Partition A Stay Mode
ARMED B
Partition B Disarmed
Partition B Armed
Partition B Stay Mode
ARMED C
Spare
ARMED D
Spare
14
‘S series’ LCD KEYPAD
AREA
A
READY
B
TROUBLE
TUE 28-MAR 10:30
BYPASS
C
D
SYSTEM
ARM
MEMORY
STAY
1
2abc
3def
BYPASS
4ghi
5jkl
6mno
CONTROL
7pqr
8stu
PROGRAM
PANIC
9vwx
- ENTER -
0yz
The Chart below gives details on the various LED indicators on the keypad and what they mean.
LIGHT\INDICATION
OFF
ON STEADY
FLASHING
READY
Zone Unsealed
All Zones Sealed
-
TROUBLE
Normal
Trouble (Tamper) Alarm
Active
New Trouble (Tamper) Alarm
BYPASS
Bypass Off
Zone Bypass Mode Active
Zone/s Bypassed
SYSTEM
Normal
Current System Alarm
New System Alarm
ARMED A
Partition A Disarmed
Partition A Armed
Partition A Stay Mode
ARMED B
Partition B Disarmed
Partition B Armed
Partition B Stay Mode
ARMED C
Spare
ARMED D
Spare
Zones 1-16
Zone status (unsealed) is indicated on the LCD module
15
LED KEYPAD MEMORY VIEW MODE
CURRENT SYSTEM ALARMS
When viewing the memory event buffer at the keypad by pressing the “MEMORY” button, the first thing that will
always be displayed are any Current System Alarms that are active. The Current System Alarms are indicated by the
Memory/Mains & Battery LEDS being on plus a zone LED from 1-8 to indicate the system alarm/s present. If no Zone
LED’s are on at this time, it means that there are no current system alarms. If a zone LED or LED’s are On then this indicates system alarms that have not yet cleared. The zone LED’s 1-8 are pre-defined as to what system alarm they will
display. These system alarm indications are shown in the table below. Following the display of current system alarms
the panel will then sequence through the 255 historical memory events starting at the most recent event.
HISTORICAL MEMORY EVENTS
CURRENT SYSTEM ALARMS
LED # 1
Battery Low
LED # 5
Radio Pendant Battery Low
LED # 2
Mains, 12V Fuse or Output Failure
LED # 6
Supervised Detector Failure
LED # 3
Telephone Line Failure
LED # 7
SensorWatch or Delinquency Alarm
LED # 4
Radio Detector Battery Low
LED # 8
Dialler Kiss-off Failure
Following the “Current System Alarms” the panel will display the historical memory events. The panel stores the most
recent events, (up to approx 256), including all alarm events, all system events such as mains failure etc as well as arming by Area. The memory events are displayed via the standard keypad with the most recent event shown first and
subsequent events following in descending order from newest to oldest.
The "MEMORY" light will be on while the memory display mode is active. To view events simply press the “MEMORY
” button. The keypad will beep and the display is advanced to the next event every time the “MEMORY” button is
pressed. When all events in memory have been displayed the keypad will exit memory mode and return to the normal
idle state. To cancel the memory display just press “ENTER”. If the “ENTER” button is not pressed and the display mode
is not advanced to the last memory event, the keypad will automatically exit memory display mode after approximately 20 seconds. The memory light will turn off once the memory display mode has been exited. The MEMORY LED
flashes when there is a new event in memory and it will stop flashing once the event has been viewed or the panel is
armed.
The Chart below gives details on the various alarms and what LED indicators are used to display them.
HISTORICAL EVENT DISPLAY CHART
EVENT
DEVICE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ACTIVATION
Zones 1-16
LED's 1-16
On Steady
BYPASS
Zones 1-16
BYPASS
LED's 1-16
On Steady
On Steady
DETECTOR TAMPER
(SHORT CIRCUIT)
Zones 1-8
TROUBLE
LED's 1-8
Flashing
On Steady
DETECTOR TAMPER
(OPEN CIRCUIT)
Zones 9-16
TROUBLE
LED's 9-16
Flashing
On Steady
CABINET TAMPER
Cabinet or Satellite Siren
TROUBLE
Flashing
WRONG CODE ALARM
Code Tamper at
Keypad #
TROUBLE
LED’s 1-8
Flashing
On Steady
PORTRAIT KEYPAD TAMPER SWITCH
ACTIVATED
Keypad Tamper Alarm at Keypad #
TROUBLE
LED’s 1-8
On Steady
On Steady
LOW BATTERY
Controller Battery
BATTERY
Flashing
16
LED KEYPAD VIEW MEMORY MODE cont.
HISTORICAL EVENT DISPLAY CHART-Continued
EVENT
DEVICE
INDICATOR
STATUS
MAINS FAILURE
Controller Mains Supply
MAINS
Flashing
12V Output FAILURE (F2 or F3)
Controller on-board
Thermal fuses activated
MAINS
LED 1
Flashing
On Steady
OUTPUT 1 or 2 FAIL
(Only applies if siren or strobe
connected)
Wires to Output 1 or 2
have been cut
LED’s 1 or 2
TROUBLE
MAINS
On Steady
On Steady
On Steady
LOW BATTERY-ZONE
(Wireless detector)
Radio Zone
Zone 1-16
BATTERY
LED's 1-16
Flashing
On Steady
LOW BATTERY-PENDANT
(wireless Transmitter)
Radio Key
User 21-100
BATTERY
LINE
CONTROL
Flashing
Flashing
On Steady
SENSORWATCH TIMEOUT
Zone 1-16
LED’s 1-16
TROUBLE
CONTROL
On Steady
Flashing
Flashing
SUPERVISED RADIO TIMEOUT
Zone 1-16
LED’s 1-16
TROUBLE
BYPASS
On Steady
Flashing
Flashing
RF FAILURE
No RF Activity
TROUBLE
AUX (0)
Flashing
Flashing
ARM DELINQUENCY ALARM
Area A or B not armed within
programmed number of days
TROUBLE
CONTROL
Flashing
Flashing
DURESS ALARM
Duress Alarm
(at Keypad #)
TROUBLE
LINE
LED’s 1-8
Flashing
Flashing
On Steady
KEYPAD PANIC
Panic Alarm at Keypad
LINE
LED’s 1-8
Flashing
Flashing
PENDANT PANIC
Radio Panic Alarm
LINE
LED’s 9-16
Flashing
On Steady
KEYPAD FIRE
Fire Alarm at Keypad
LINE
CONTROL
LED’s 1-8
Flashing
Flashing
On Steady
KEYPAD MEDICAL
Medical Alarm at Keypad
LINE
BYPASS
LED’s 1-8
Flashing
Flashing
On Steady
ARMED
Area "A" Armed
"A"
On Steady
ARMED
Area "B" Armed
"B"
On Steady
STAY MODE ON
Area "A" in Stay Mode
"A"
Flashing
STAY MODE ON
Area "B" in Stay Mode
"B"
Flashing
TELEPHONE LINE FAIL
Panel Dialler
LINE
On Steady
EXCESSIVE RE-TRIES
Panel Dialler
LINE
LED 1
On Steady
On Steady
FAILURE TO GET A KISSOFF
Panel Dialler
LINE
LED 2
On Steady
On Steady
WALKTEST MODE
Manual Walk-test Mode
MAINS
BATTERY
LINE
LED’s 1-16
On Steady
On Steady
On Steady
On Steady
17
LCD KEYPAD VIEW MEMORY MODE
The LCD Keypad has similar operational functions to the LED keypad with one notable exception, when displaying
Memory Events in “Memory Mode” it will display the events using plain text messages with the Time & date that the
event occurred.
This makes the fault diagnosis much easier. On an LED keypad only the ARM indications are displayed (the disarm is
removed from the display) but with the LCD keypad all events can be displayed (including when the system was
disarmed and by who).
To access “Memory Mode” using the LCD keypad, press the “MEMORY” button.
There are two parts to the Memory Display Mode. They are;
CURRENT SYSTEM ALARMS
If there are any current “SYSTEM” alarms, they will be displayed first under the heading of “CURRENT ALARMS”.
There are up to 8 “system alarms” that can be displayed at this point. They are listed in the “Current System Alarms” table
on page 15. The current system alarms will be displayed in plain text to describe the actual problem. If there is more than
one current problem the keypad will display event alarm sequentially with the heading of “CURRENT ALARMS” on the top
line and the alarm on the bottom line.
Each time the “MEMORY” button is pressed, the next alarm will be displayed. If there are no system problems with the
panel the display will show “NO FAULTS”. When all current system alarms have been displayed the keypad will then start
to show the historical memory events.
HISTORICAL MEMORY EVENTS
Following the “Current System Alarms” the panel will display the historical memory events. The panel stores the most
recent events, (up to 255), including all alarm events, all system events such as mains failure etc as well as arm/disarm by
User & Area. The memory events are displayed via the LCD keypad with the most recent event shown first and subsequent events following in descending order from newest to oldest.
During the “Historical Memory Event” display mode the LCD display will show the type of event on the top line eg “Area A
armed by User 1” and the actual time and date that the event occurred on the bottom line.
To view events simply press the “MEMORY” button. The keypad will beep and the display is advanced to the next event
every time the “MEMORY” button is pressed.
If you wish to go back and look at an earlier event you can use the “” or “STAY” buttons to go back to an earlier event.
Each time the Down arrow is pressed the memory will go back one event. When all events in memory have been displayed the keypad will exit memory mode and return to the normal idle state. To cancel the memory display just press
“ENTER”.
If the “ENTER” button is not pressed and the display mode is not advanced to the last memory event, the keypad will
automatically exit memory display mode after approximately 20 seconds.
When there is a new event in memory the words “ NEW MEM EVENT” will be shown on the LCD display.
The “ NEW MEM EVENT” display will be reset once the event has been viewed or the panel is armed.
18
KEYPAD INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
Large – Landscape Style Keypads
Separate the two halves of the Keypad by carefully inserting a small screwdriver into the release slots on the bottom
edge of the keypad front half and applying gentle pressure. This will release the bottom edge of the housing enough
for you to unclip the top.
Slim-line Portrait Style Keypads
To separate the two keypad halves of the Slim-line Keypad, unscrew the fastening screw at the bottom of the keypad
and lever up to release the top.
Mounting
Screw the base to the wall using the mounting holes provided. These holes will match the standard single switch
plate spacing. Ensure the base is mounted right side up. It is marked with the word "TOP", on the Landscape Style
Keypad base, or the screw should be at the bottom on the Portrait Style Keypad base. When fixing the base to the
wall make sure the top of the screw heads will not touch or short out the underside of the PCB when the top half of
the keypad is reinstalled. Bring the cables through the centre of the base.
Connect the 4 wires to the 5 way terminal block on the rear of the keypad PCB making sure to match the cables up
with the terminals as marked on the control panel's keypad port. The 5th wire is an optional “Listen-in“ connection.
It is connected from the "LIN" terminal of the keypad to the "Lin" terminal of the panel keypad port. With the Listenin wire connected, the user can hear the call progress during dialling at the keypad (provided the desired program
options at address P175E 6E are turned on).
Once the cables have been terminated and the required address allocated (see section below) fit the front half of
the keypad onto the base. The maximum recommended cable distance using standard 0.2mm security cable is 50m.
Cable runs exceeding this distance may require 0.5mm cable. Always use good quality cable. Some installations may
require CAT5 data cable to ensure data integrity in noisy sites.
KEYPAD ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
A total of 8 devices (keypads or proximity readers) can be connected to the panel. Each keypad and reader must be
addressed individually to avoid BUS conflicts when multiple users are operating different keypads simultaneously.
By default, each keypad and reader comes addressed as KP # 1.
LED KEYPAD ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
Setting the LED keypad address is done in “Local Program Mode”.
To enter “Local Program Mode” on the LED Keypad you must press and hold the <CONTROL> button down and
within 2 seconds, press the <BYPASS> button (Landscape Keypad or
button (Portrait Keypad).
The “PROGRAM” LED will turn on plus the current keypad address will be displayed on the zone LED’s.
The default setting is address 1 so zone LED 1 should be on.
To change the keypad address so that it is different to others connected to the panel, press a number on the keypad
from 1-8 relating to the address you wish to assign to the keypad, e.g. if the keypad is the second one connected to
the panel and the other keypad is set to address 1, press 2 to select keypad address 2 for this keypad. The selected
address will be displayed on the zone LED’s (in this example LED 2 would be on).
To Exit “Local Program Mode” press the <ENTER> Button.
The “PROGRAM” LED will turn off and the display will return to normal with the Mains & Battery LED’s on.
ICON LCD KEYPAD ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
Setting the ICON LCD keypad address is done in “Local Program Mode”.
To enter “Local Program Mode” on the ICON LCD Keypad, press the <PROG> button, then <BYPASS>, then
<ENTER>.
The display will read “LPGM”
To Exit “Local Program Mode”, press <PROG>, then <ENTER>
19
To change the keypad address so that it is different to others connected to the panel,
Press <PROG> <902> <ENTER>. The Keypad display will show “KP:1”. To change the keypad address so that it is different to others connected to the panel, press a number on the keypad from 1-8 relating to the address you wish to assign
to the keypad, e.g. if the keypad is the second one connected to the panel and the other keypad is set to address 1, press
2 to select keypad address 2 for this keypad. The selected address will be displayed on the Icon LCD (in this example
KP:2).
Press <ENTER> to save the change.
ICON LCD KEYPAD ADJUSTMENTS
Local Program Mode also gives you the ability to adjust some individual Keypad functionality.
Once in Program Mode using the <PROG> <BYPASS> & <ENTER> and the display showing “LPGM” use the programming addresses below to make changes if required;
<PROG> <900> <ENTER>
1 ON = 12-hour Clock, 1 OFF = 24-hour Clock
2 ON = Clock & Temperature Displayed alternatively, 2 OFF = Clock only
3 ON = Display Temperature with ENTER button is pressed, 3 OFF = Feature Disabled
4 ON = NOT USED
5 ON = All Lights will turn off after 90 seconds of inactivity
<PROG> <901> <ENTER>
Keypad Software Version display
<PROG> <902> <ENTER>
Keypad Address (1-8) All Keypads on the same system must have a different address
<PROG> <903> <ENTER>
Calibrate Temperature Sensor the current temp will be displayed
(Warning, don’t adjust this location unless you have a calibrated temp source available)
<PROG> <904> <ENTER>
Backlight Brightness display will show “B/L” to adjust press <MEMORY↑> to
increase or <STAY↓> to decrease.
<PROG> <905> <ENTER>
LCD Contrast display will show “CTRS” to adjust press <MEMORY↑> to increase or
<STAY↓> to decrease.
<PROG> <906> <ENTER>
Buzzer Tone display will show “BUZ” to adjust press <MEMORY↑> to increase or
<STAY↓> to decrease.
<PROG> <920> <ENTER>
Default all Keypad Local Programming Options will be returned to factory default
Note: after adjusting any programming options, <ENTER> must be pressed to save changes.
*You can not access Local Programming Mode if the system is Armed or Stay Armed.
LCD KEYPAD ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
Setting the LCD keypad address is done in “Local Program Mode”.
To enter “Local Program Mode” on the LCD Keypad, press AND HOLD the <CONTROL> button down and within 3 seconds press and hold the <ARM> button until the displays shows “Local Mode”.
When in Local Program Mode, the display will show “local mode kb 1” with the number 1 meaning the keypad address is
currently 1.
To change the keypad address press <PROGRAM> <996> <ENTER>.
The Keypad display will show “Keypad Number 1” then press a number on the keypad from 1-8 relating to the address
you wish to assign to the keypad, e.g. if the keypad is the second one connected to the panel and the other keypad is set
to address 1, press 2 to select keypad address 2 for this keypad. Then press <ENTER> to save.
To exit Local Program Mode, press and hold the <PROGRAM> button for 2 seconds.
During Local Program Mode, you can select the program option location directly or there is also a menu to navigate
through the various options.
20
LCD KEYPAD ADJUSTMENTS
The user can independently adjust the backlight level of the LCD Display and Keypad Buttons from Off to On and 16 steps
between.
LARGE – LANDSCAPE STYLE KEYPADS
Adjusting the LCD Backlight
To increase the Landscape Keypad LCD Backlight, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds by
the <ARM> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <ARM> button, you can increase the LCD Backlight level to the maximum.
To reduce the Landscape Keypad LCD Backlight, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds by
the <PANIC> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <PANIC> button, you can
decrease the LCD Backlight level until it is off.
Adjusting the Button Backlight
To increase the Landscape Keypad Button Backlight, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds
by the <MEMORY> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <MEMORY> button,
you can increase the Button Backlight level to the maximum.
To reduce the Landscape Keypad Button Backlight, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds
by the <STAY> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <STAY> button, you can
decrease the Button Backlight level until it is off.
Adjusting the keypad Buzzer Tone
To increase the frequency of the Landscape Keypad Buzzer, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2
seconds by the <1> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <1> button, you can
increase the frequency of the Buzzer tone.
To reduce the frequency of the Landscape Keypad Buzzer, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds by the <2> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <2> button, you can
decrease the frequency of the Buzzer tone.
SLIM-LINE PORTRAIT STYLE KEYPAD
Adjusting the LCD Backlight
To increase the Portrait Keypad LCD Backlight, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds by the
<STAY> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <STAY> button, you can increase the LCD Backlight level to the maximum.
To reduce the Portrait Keypad LCD Backlight, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds by the
<BYPASS> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <BYPASS> button, you can
decrease the LCD Backlight level until it is off.
Adjusting the Button Backlight
To increase the Portrait Keypad Button Backlight, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds by
the <MEM> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <MEM> button, you can
increase the Button Backlight level to the maximum.
To reduce the Portrait Keypad Button Backlight, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds by
the <.> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <.> button, you can decrease the
Button Backlight level until it is off.
Adjusting the keypad Buzzer Tone
To increase the frequency of the Landscape Keypad Buzzer, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2
seconds by the <A> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <A> button, you can
increase the frequency of the Buzzer tone.
To reduce the frequency of the Landscape Keypad Buzzer, press and hold the <CONTROL> button followed within 2 seconds by the <B> button. By holding down the <CONTROL> button and repeatedly pressing the <B> button, you can
decrease the frequency of the Buzzer tone.
21
LCD KEYPAD “LOCAL EDIT” PROGRAM MODE
The Local Edit Program Mode allows the programming of a customised “System Name” (the name displayed during
idle mode at the keypad), Customised “Zone Names” (the text that appears on the keypad when a zone is unsealed),
Customised “User Names” (the User name that will appear when viewing arm/disarm events in memory mode), Customised “Area Names” (the Area name that will appear when viewing arm/disarm events in memory mode) and Customised
“Output Names” (the Output name that will appear when viewing Output On/Off events in memory mode).
ACCESSING LOCAL PROGRAM MODE
To enter “Local Program Mode” on the LCD Keypad, press AND HOLD the <CONTROL> button down and within 3 seconds press and hold the <ARM> button until the displays shows “Local Mode”.
When in Local Program Mode, the display will show “local mode kb 1” with the number 1 meaning the keypad address is
currently 1.
There are two ways to program the keypad in “Local Edit Mode”. You can enter in the program location directly from the
list below or you can use the menu function to navigate through all of the program options. The menus are described on
the following pages.
LOCAL EDIT MODE DIRECT PROGRAM ADDRESSES
There are a number of program addresses available to you at this point. They are;
<PROG> <1> <ENTER>
Zone #1 Text (maximum 16 characters)
TO
<PROG> <16> <ENTER>
Zone #16 Text
<PROG> <800> <ENTER>
Update editable text to all LCD Keypads
<PROG> <801> <ENTER>
Return all editable Text to Default
<PROG> <995> <ENTER>
Panel Type
<PROG> <996> <ENTER>
Set Keypad Address Number, from 1-8
<PROG> <997> <ENTER>
Keypad Language
<PROG> <998> <ENTER>
Area Identifying Character (assigning numbers or letters to Areas)
<PROG> <999> <ENTER>
Panel Name Display (maximum 16 characters)
<PROG> <1001> <ENTER>
TO
<PROG> <1100> <ENTER>
Program User #1 Name
<PROG> <2001> <ENTER>
Area “A” Identifying Name (maximum 16 character Area name)
<PROG> <2002> <ENTER>
Area “B” Identifying Name (maximum 16 character Area name)
<PROG> <3001> <ENTER>
TO
<PROG> <3008> <ENTER>
Program Output #1 Name
Program Users #100 Name
Program Output #8 Name
22
LCD KEYPAD “LOCAL EDIT” MODE MENU PROGRAMMING
The LCD Keypad Main menu headings for “Local Edit” program mode are listed on this page. On entering Local Edit Mode
the display will look like the example below.
LOCAL MODE KB 1
USER NAMES
To move to the next menu heading simply press the arrow. To move back to the previous heading simply press the Arrow.
LCD “LOCAL EDIT” MENU HEADINGS
(Navigate with Up/Down Arrows)
USER NAMES
PANEL NAME
Press <> or <>
Arrows to move between
Menus
AREA ID
LANGUAGE
KEYPAD NUMBER
PANEL TYPE
OUTPUT NAMES
AREA NAMES
ZONE NAMES
UPDATE ALL KPADS
DEFAULT ALL TEXT
Press <PROGRAM> until you
get here.
Press <ENTER> to exit
Program Mode
EXIT PROGRAMMING
23
When you are at the desired main menu heading, press <ENTER> to access the data program location. See example
below.
Local Mode Kb 1
User Names
MAIN-MENU
Arrows can be used to select the MainMenu heading.
Button
ENTER
To Program User Names
DATA SELECT-MENU
CHANGING
AREA SINGLE CHARACTER IDENTIFIER
PROGRAM THE
Button
Leaves Data Select-Mode
and returns to Main-Menu
Arrows can be used to select the User
Name you wish to edit.
When you enter in [PROG]-[998]-[ENTER] the display will look like the example above. You may edit the single character
Area identifier at this address starting at Area “A” (first left-hand position). The keypad allows for up to 16 areas but the
actual number of areas supported on this panel is two. The first character (in this case the ”A”) is the identifier used to
USER
100
1
2
show
the
status of the first Area when armed. USER
The second
position (in this case the “B”) isUSER
the identifier
used to show the
status of the second Area.
If you preferred to have the first area shown as Area “1” and not “A” then you can change it here using the same method
as used previously. With the cursor underneath the letter “A”, Press the “1” button four times until the
Arrow character in the first slot shows
“1”.
Arrow
When you are happy with the changes Press the “ENTER” button to save the changes.
CHANGING THE ZONE NAMES
Button
ENTER
To Program User Names
When in “Local Edit Program Mode” and you have entered {PROG}-[1]-[ENTER], the display will look like this;
DATA ENTRY-MENU
The PROGRAM
Cursor will be
underneath the first letter to be edited (in this case the “Z”).
Button
USER 1by the numeric
<A...Z>buttons (0-9) will be in capitals.
TheLeaves
letters
<A..Z>
indicate that the letters selected
Data Entry-Menu
Arrows can be used to select the text
USER 1 button once, the display willoptions.
and goes the
back“MEMORY
to Data
By pressing
(AAP)” or “MEMÇ (CROW)”
change
to <a..z>
that the
Pressing
the indicating
Arrow will change
Select-Menu
the text selection box for <A...Z> to <a...z> to
letters selected
by the numeric buttons (0-9) will be lower case.
<‫ד‬...‫>ג‬
thento
back
to <A...Z>.
Pressing that
the HeBy pressing the “MEMORY (AAP)” or “MEMÇ (CROW)” button again, the display will
change
<‫ד‬..‫>ג‬
indicating
Arrow makes the same selections in the rebrew characters can be selected by the numeric buttons (0-9).
verse order.
You can cycle back to another selection by pressing the “STAY (AAP)” or “È (CROW)” button.
Once you have selected the desired font you can now proceed to change the text for Zone 1.
Arrows are used to move the cursor. The
cursor identifies the character currently being
The following table shows the English Characters
that can be selected by each numeric button.
edited. You can enter up to 16 characters.
The lower case options are shown in ( ).
<CONTROL> <B> (Large -Landscape Keypad
or,By
<CONTROL>
(Slim-lineonce,
Portrait
There are four different selections per button.
pressing <2>
the button
a keycharacter will appear in the display (see “1st
pad) will
return
textcause
to default
press” column below) . Pressing the same button
again
will
thesetting.
display to change to the next character in the se-
quence (see “2nd press” column). After you have pressed the same button four times the next press (5th) will cause the
display to wrap back to the beginning.
Once you have selected the first character, Press the “PANICÆ (AAP)” or “BYPASSÆ (CROW)” button to move the cursor
one position to the right.
Now select the second character and move the cursor to the right repeating the process until all of the text is completed
(Remember that there are a maximum of 16 characters per program address).
If you make a mistake use the “ÅARM (AAP)” or “STAYÅ (CROW)” button to move the cursor towards the left and make
any corrections.
24
CHANGING THE AREA SINGLE CHARACTER IDENTIFIER
Areas
<A..Z>
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
When you enter in [PROG]-[998]-[ENTER] the display will look like the example above. You may edit the single character
Area identifier at this address starting at Area “A” (first left-hand position). The keypad allows for up to 16 areas but the
actual number of areas supported on this panel is two. The first character (in this case the ”A”) is the identifier used to
show the status of the first Area when armed. The second position (in this case the “B”) is the identifier used to show the
status of the second Area. If you preferred to have the first area shown as Area “1” and not “A” then you can change it here
using the same method as used previously. With the cursor underneath the letter “A”, Press the “1” button four times
until the character in the first slot shows “1”. When you are happy with the changes Press the “ENTER” button to save the
changes.
CHANGING THE ZONE NAMES
When in “Local Edit Program Mode” and you have entered [PROG]-[1]-[ENTER], the display will look like this;
Zone 1
<A..Z>
Zone 1
The Cursor will be underneath the first letter to be edited (in this case the “Z”). The letters <A..Z> indicate that the letters selected by the numeric buttons (0-9) will be in capitals.
By pressing the “MEMORY (Portrait)” or “MEM (Landscape)” button once, the display will change to <a..z> indicating
that the letters selected by the numeric buttons (0-9) will be lower case. By pressing the “MEMORY (Portrait)” or “MEM
(Landscape)” button again, the display will change to <‫ד‬..‫ >ג‬indicating that Hebrew characters can be selected by the
numeric buttons (0-9).
You can cycle back to another selection by pressing the “STAY (Portrait)” or “ (Landscape)” button. Once you have selected the desired font you can now proceed to change the text for Zone 1.
The following table shows the English Characters that can be selected by each numeric button.
▼ Button #
1st Press
2nd Press
3rd Press
4th Press
1
* (‘)
# (<)
= (>)
1
2
A (a)
B (b)
C (c)
2
3
D (d)
E (e)
F (f)
3
4
G (g)
H (h)
I (i)
4
5
J (j)
K (k)
L (l)
5
6
M (m)
N (n)
O (o)
6
7
P (p)
Q (q)
R (r)
7
8
S (s)
T (t)
U (u)
8
9
V (v)
W (w)
X (x)
9
0
Blank
Y (y)
Z (z)
0
The lower case options are shown in ( ).
There are four different selections per button. By pressing the button once, a character will appear in the display (see “1st
press” column below) . Pressing the same button again will cause the display to change to the next character in the sequence (see “2nd press” column). After you have pressed the same button four times the next press (5th) will cause the
display to wrap back to the beginning. Once you have selected the first character, Press the “PANIC(Portrait)” or
“BYPASS (Landscape)” button to move the cursor one position to the right.
Now select the second character and move the cursor to the right repeating the process until all of the text is completed
(Remember that there are a maximum of 16 characters per program address). If you make a mistake use the “ARM
(Portrait)” or “STAY (Landscape)” button to move the cursor towards the left and make any corrections. When you are
happy with the text Press “ENTER” to save the changes. You can program the text for all zones in the same way.
25
CHANGING THE KEYPAD AREA NAME
AREA A
<A..Z>
Area A
When you enter [PROG]-[2001]-[ENTER] the display will look like the example above. You may edit the Area Name at this
location. The area name can be up to 16 characters long. If you program in a name for the area, this name will appear
when displaying events in memory display mode.
When you are happy with the changes Press the “ENTER” button to save the changes.
CHANGING THE KEYPAD NAME
Name
<A..Z>
ELITE S
When you enter [PROG]-[999]-[ENTER] the display will look like the example above. You may enter any name you wish
up to 16 characters in length (using the same method as described for zone names). This name is
displayed at the keypad in Idle mode.
When you are happy with the changes Press “ENTER” to save.
CHANGING THE USER NAMES
User 1
<A..Z>
User 1
When in “Local Edit Program Mode” and you have entered [PROG]-[1001]-[ENTER], the display will look like this;
You can now enter in the persons name (maximum of 16 characters). When viewing events in “Memory” mode, the User
name will appear to identify who the user was that Armed/Disarmed the system.
When you are happy with the changes Press “ENTER” to save.
CHANGING THE OUTPUT NAMES
Output 1
<A..Z>
Output 1
When in “Local Edit Program Mode” and you have entered [PROG]-[3001]-[ENTER], the display will look like this;
You can now enter an Output name (maximum of 16 characters). When viewing events in “Memory” mode, the
Output name will appear to identify what function the Output is controlling.
When you are happy with the changes Press “ENTER” to save.
RESETTING INDIVIDUAL TEXT TO DEFAULT or LAST SAVED SETTING
While in “Local Edit Mode” there are two special functions that can be performed at any of the “Local Edit” Program locations.
They are “Return to Default Text” or “Return to Previously Saved Text”.
For Example, to Return the Zone 1 text back to Defaults;
If during the programming of Zone 1 text [PROG]-[1]-[ENTER] you wished to return back to the default text, simply Press
and hold the “CONTROL” button followed within 2 seconds by “2” if using an Portrait Keypad. If using a Landscape Keypad press and hold the “B” button for 2 seconds, and the text will return to the default settings.
If you wished to return to the last saved version of the text simply Press and hold the “CONTROL” button followed within
2 seconds by “1” if using an Portrait Keypad. If using a Landscape Keypad press and hold the “A” button for 2 seconds and
the last saved text for zone one will appear.
26
NOTE: If the last saved version of text for Zone 1 was in fact the default setting, then pressing “Control” then “1” or “A” will
return the default text anyway.
RESETTING ALL TEXT TO DEFAULT
While in “Local Edit Mode” it is possible to restore all of the customisable text fields to the factory default settings.
When you enter in [PROG]-[801]-[ENTER] display will prompt you to press [801]-[ENTER] again. Once you have pressed
“801 enter”, all customisable text (eg zone names, user names, output names, etc) will be returned to the default text.
COPYING TEXT TO ANOTHER LCD KEYPAD
If more than one LCD keypad is connected to the panel, it is possible to copy the edited Text from one LCD keypad to all
other LCD keypads connected to the same panel.
When you enter in [PROG]-[800]-[ENTER], all of the customisable text at the keypad will be transferred to all other LCD
keypads connected to the control panel.
To maintain compatibility with earlier LCD keypads there is also an alternative method to transfer the text. If using an
Portrait Keypad, while in “Local Edit Mode” at the keypad with the edited text press “Control” followed within 2 seconds
by “3”. If using a Landscape Keypad pressing the “CHIME” button for 2 seconds while in “Local Edit Mode” will perform
the transfer. The text in your keypad will be transferred to all other LCD keypads connected to the panel.
EXITING LOCAL EDIT PROGRAM MODE
Press and hold the <PROGRAM> button for 2 seconds and the LCD keypad will leave Local Edit Mode and return to Idle
Mode or;
Press the <PROGRAM> button repeatedly until the display reads “Exit Programming”, then press the <ENTER>
button to exit program mode.
27
ACCESSING PROGRAM MODE
HOW TO PROGRAM USING LED KEYPADS
The programming sequence follows this pattern;
<PROGRAM> - <1,2 or 3 digit address> - <ENTER>
(Program Address)
1 short beep if OK - 1 long beep if error, THEN
<PROGRAM> - <1,2 or 3 digit sub-address> - <ENTER>
3 short beeps if OK - 1 long beep if error
(Sub-Address)
The LED’s will display current value or status
Enter the new value or option
<New Value> - <ENTER>
3 short beeps if OK - 1 long beep if error
Throughout this manual you will see program instructions expressed as
P 1 E 1-100 E
Using the above example the <P> represents the PROGRAM key and <E> represents the ENTER key.
<1> refers to the address for programming User Codes and <1-100> refers to Users 1-100.
ACCESS TO PROGRAMMING ON POWER UP (INSTALLER MODE)
When power is applied to the controller for the first time and with the panel tamper input open, the panel will
inhibit tamper alarms and ready the panel to enter INSTALLER PROGRAM MODE (unless the Installer Lock-out at
address P25E10E Option 8 has previously been enabled). At this point you can go to any keypad which is connected
to the panel and press <PROGRAM> <ENTER> which will automatically put that keypad into full Program mode.
The Program LED will now be Flashing (NOTE: Only one keypad can be in Program mode at any time).
ACCESS TO INSTALLER PROGRAM MODE FROM RUN MODE
Before you can enter Installer program mode from normal operating mode, the panel must not be Armed or in Stay
mode. Program mode access is inhibited if any part of the system is Armed.
Press <PROGRAM> - <Installer Code> - <ENTER>
Program light will Flash
Note: Default Installer Code (P25E1E) is 000000.
You are now in Installer Program Mode. Any program addresses may be viewed or changed in this mode.
ACCESS TO CLIENT PROGRAM MODE FROM RUN MODE
Press <PROGRAM> - <Master User Code> - <ENTER>
Program light On Steady
Note: Default Master User Code is code # 1 (P1E1E) which is 1234.
You are now in Client Program Mode. Access to certain program locations is limited while in Client mode (see the
options at address P5E). Each User can have different privileges based on the options assigned to the User at address
P5E. If no options are set at address P5E for a user, they will not be allowed access to Client program Mode.
RESETTING BACK TO FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS (From Install Mode Only)
There are two addresses that allow you to reset the panel back to the factory defaults. The first resets just User
Codes, Installer Code & Telephone Numbers. The Second resets all programming back to the factory Defaults.
e.g. To reset All System defaults:
Press <PROGRAM> - <P200E10E> - <ENTER>
3 short beeps if OK - 1 long beep if error
28
After the system configuration has been reset back to defaults, all values, options & Codes will be set to the values shown
in the Program Summary as defaults. These values have been chosen as the most common set-up for the majority of
systems.
To reset partial defaults:
Press <PROGRAM> - <P200E9E> - <ENTER>
3 short beeps if OK - 1 long beep if error
The partial reset to defaults will return all User Codes, the Installer Code and Telephone Numbers back to the values
shown in the Program Summary as defaults. These values have been chosen as the most common set-up for the majority
of systems.
TO EXIT PROGRAM MODES USING LED KEYPAD
To exit either program mode when you have finished programming:
Press <PROGRAM> - <ENTER>
Program light goes out
If no buttons are pressed for 4.5 minutes the panel will automatically exit program mode
The panel is now back in Run Mode, any program changes you have made will have replaced previous values and be in
effect.
Note: During programming Tampers and 24 hour alarms are disabled which allows quiet access to the panel, detectors
and external siren units, etc. On exiting program mode, all inputs are scanned and if any tampers or 24Hr alarms are
present an activation will occur.
TO EXIT PROGRAM MODES USING LCD KEYPAD
There are two ways to exit Program Mode with an LCD keypad. To exit either program mode when you have finished
programming:
Repeatedly press the <PROGRAM> button until the display shows
“<ENTER> TO EXIT”
Now press <ENTER> to exit Program Mode.,
OR
Press and hold the <PROGRAM> button for 2 seconds to exit program mode
If no buttons are pressed for 4.5 minutes the panel will automatically exit program mode
The panel is now back in Run Mode, any program changes you have made will have replaced previous values and be in
effect.
Note: During programming Tampers and 24 hour alarms are disabled which allows quiet access to the panel, detectors
and external siren units, etc. On exiting program mode, all inputs are scanned and if any tampers or 24Hr alarms are
present an activation will occur.
HOW TO PROGRAM USING LCD KEYPADS
Access to Program Mode when using an LCD Keypad is exactly the same as when using an LED Keypad (see previous page
for access to program mode from power-up and normal run mode).
Once in Program Mode (either Client Mode or Installer Mode), the User can still enter program addresses directly at the
keypad to go straight to a particular address, as with the LED Keypad.
But the LCD Keypad also incorporates built-in menus that allow the Programmer to move through the Main-Menus using
the Up/Down Arrow keys. Also when at a data entry location, the Left/Right Arrows can be used. These special Function
Arrow keys are clearly marked on the keypad buttons (the position of the buttons can vary depending on the type of LCD
Keypad installed).
When navigating the Menus using the Arrow keys, each button has a special function depending on where you are within
the menus.
When you enter program mode the LCD Keypad display automatically defaults to “CLIENT:USER” (if in Client mode) or
“INSTALLER:USER” (if in Installer mode). By using the UP or DOWN Arrows, the user can cycle through all of the available
menus. The menus are accessed in a particular order based on the most frequently used program locations. All of the
Main and the Sub-Menus are shown on the following pages.
29
LCD KEYPAD MENU PROGRAMMING
The LCD Keypad enables “Manual Free’ programming of the
‘S series’ panel. Easy to follow plain text Menus
will be displayed on the keypad to enable selection of the desired programming options.
ENTER
PROGRAM
<ENTER> key selects the Menu you wish to work in or the option in a Sub-Menu you wish to
use.
<PROGRAM> key will step you back to the previous Menu level.
<Up> or <Down> arrow keys will allow you to cycle through the Menu options (Main & Sub Menus).
<Left> or <Right> arrow keys can be used when in the Data Entry-Menus to cycle through the
options (eg if in “USERS” Data Entry-Menu, the options would be Users 1-100, if in “ZONES” the
options would Zones 1-16, etc)
SELECTING THE MAIN-MENU HEADINGS (“ Up” or “ Down” Arrow Keys)
Enter “INSTALLER” Program Mode eg <PROGRAM> - <INSTALLER CODE (000000)> - <ENTER>.
The LCD will display “INSTALLER:USERS”. This is the default Main-Menu heading.
To access a desired program location you first navigate to the desired Main-Menu by using the “ Up” or “ Down”
arrow keys on the keypad. Each press of “ Up” or “ Down” arrow keys will advance the display to the next Menu
heading.
The Main-Menu headings are shown on the top line of the LCD display.
To access the Sub-Menu options from a Main-Menu press the <ENTER> button.
SELECTING THE SUB-MENU HEADINGS (“ Up” or “ Down” Arrow Keys)
Having pressed the <ENTER> button at the selected Main-Menu heading the keypad will now show Sub-Menus for that
heading. The Main-Menu heading will remain on the top line of the LCD display and the Sub-Menus will appear on the
bottom line. Each press of “ Up” or “ Down” arrow keys will advance the Sub-Menus displayed on the bottom line
either up or down by one location.
To access the Data Entry-Menu options from the Sub-Menu press the <ENTER> button.
SELECTING THE DATA ENTRY-MENU HEADINGS
Having pressed the <ENTER> button at the desired Sub-Menu heading, the keypad will now be in the Data Entry-Mode.
The Main-Menu heading on the top line of the display will be replaced with the actual data entry field description, eg if
you had gone from “USERS” to “CODES” then to the data entry field of codes the display will show “USER CODE 1” on the
top line of the display and the code “123” on the bottom line (“123” being the default User 1 code). See the chart on
page 21 for details.
You can now change the code, eg to change Code # 1 to 4567 press <4567> <ENTER>. The bottom line will now show
the new code of “4567”.
At this point you can use the “ Up” or “ Down” arrow keys to cycle through the other Sub-Menu options for User
Code 1 to program all of the options for code 1, or;
You can use the “ Left” or “ Right” arrow keys to cycle through all of the User codes. This allows you to program all of
the user codes from 1-100. The “ Right” arrow key when pressed will take you up one User at a time and the “ Left”
arrow key will take you down one User, eg if the display was currently showing “USER CODE 10”, pressing the “ Left”
arrow key will take the display to “USER CODE 9”, pressing the “ Right” arrow key will take the display to “USER CODE
11”. You can also use the “ Left” or “ Right” arrow keys to move through all of the User codes, and while at a particular
User, you can also use the “ Up” or “ Down” arrow keys to program all options for that User.
If you are at a location that has 8 programmable options, eg P4E where the User Arm/Disarm options can be set, by press-
30
ing and holding the <CONTROL> button then within 2 seconds pressing the <ENTER> button you can access the
sub- text that describes what each option can do. To exit the sub-text display press <ENTER>.
STEPPING BACK THROUGH THE MENUS
If you are in a Menu location, eg the “USER” Data Entry field, and you wish to step back one stage to the previous SubMenu, you need to press the <PROGRAM> button.
Each time the <PROGRAM> button is pressed the display will step back to the previous stage (remembering where you
were before) until you get back to the Main-Menu.
For example if you were in the “KEYPADS” Main-Menu, then pressed <ENTER> to get to the “AREAS” Sub-Menu for keypads, then pressed <ENTER> again to get to the “AREAS” Data Entry-Menu for keypads, you could now press the
<PROGRAM> button once and it would take you back to the “KEYPADS/AREAS” Sub-Menu. Pressing <PROGRAM> again
will take you back to the “KEYPADS” Main-Menu, and pressing <PROGRAM> one more time will return you back to the
default “USERS” Main-Menu.
If you get back to the “USERS” menu and press the <PROGRAM> button once more the display will go to the
program exit menu. If you press <ENTER> when at this point the panel will leave program mode. If you don’t wish to
leave program mode you can press the <PROGRAM> button again to return to the “USERS” menu.
The flowchart below indicates the program menu steps using the “ARROW” , “ENTER” & “PROGRAM” Buttons on the keypad.
USERS (Main-Menu Heading)
_
ENTER
MAIN-MENU
or Arrows will Cycle
through Main-Menus
Button
To access Sub-Menu
PROGRAM
Button
Leaves Sub-Menu and goes
back to Main-Menu
USERS (Main-Menu Heading)
CODES (Sub-Menu Heading)
ENTER
SUB-MENU
or Arrows will Cycle
through Sub-Menus
Button
To access Data-Menu
DATA ENTRY-MENU
PROGRAM
Button
Leaves Data-Mode and goes
back to Sub-Menu
LEARN RADIO USER 1
-ENTER- TO LEARN
Arrows can be used in the DataMenu fields. See below for details.
Arrow
USER 100 CODE
— (Data)
USER 1 CODE
123 (Data)
Arrow
USER 2 CODE
— (Data)
Arrow Arrow
USER 1 ACCESS OPT
- - - - - - - - (Data)
31
Pressing <CONTROL> then
<ENTER> will display the 8
Sub text options at this
location
“MAIN”-MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
SIA EVENTS
4+2 EVENTS
MISCELLANEOUS
KEYSWITCH
OUTPUTS
KEYPADS
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZONES-MAIN
AREAS
DIALLER
PHONE NUMBERS
CLOCK SETTINGS
INSTALLER:USERS
<ENTER> TO EXIT
(Navigate with Up/Down Arrows)
“PROGRAM”
To Main-Menu
“ENTER”
To Sub-Menu
LEARN PENDANT
DELETE PENDANT
FIND PENDANT
K/PAD ASSIGNMENT
KEYPAD OPTIONS
TYPE
AREAS
ACCESS OPTIONS
CODES
“USERS” SUB-MENU
(Navigate with Up/Down Arrows)
“PROGRAM”
To Sub-Menu
“ENTER”
To Data-Menu
Figure 1
RADIO USER 1 LEARN
USER 1 KEYPADS
USER 1 KEYPAD OPT
USER 1 TYPE
USER 1 AREAS
USR 1 ACCESS OPT
USER 1 CODE
(Navigate with Up/Down Arrows)
USER 2 CODE
“USERS” DATA-ENTRY
Figure 2
USER 1 CODE
USER 100 CODE
Users are shown as the
example on this page but the
same properties apply to
Zones, Areas, Outputs, etc,
when programming with the
LCD Keypad.
2) If the “Left” or “
Right” Arrows are used, the
Menus will cycle through all
of the individual Users (see
Figure 2).
1) If the “Up” or “Down”
Arrows are used, the Menus
will cycle through the different Sub-Menus for a particular User (see Figure 1)
There are two Menu
navigating options when in
the Program-Data Menus.
Using the “Users” examples
shown on this page;
(Navigate with Left/Right Arrows)
“USERS” DATA-ENTRY
LCD KEYPAD PROGRAM MENU FLOWCHART
LCD “MAIN” MENU HEADINGS
“MAIN”-MENU
(Navigate with Up/Down Arrows)
Press <PROGRAM> until you
get here.
Press <ENTER> to exit
Program Mode
<ENTER> TO EXIT
INSTALLER: USERS
Press <PROGRAM> to alternate between “EXIT” &
“USERS”.
CLOCK SETTINGS
PHONE NUMBERS
DIALLER
Press <> or <> to
move between Menus
AREAS
ZONES-MAIN
ZONES-OUTPUTS
KEYPADS
OUTPUTS
KEYSWITCH
MISCELLANEOUS
4+2 EVENTS
SIA EVENTS
DIAGNOSTICS
33
LCD KEYPAD MAIN & SUB MENU PROGRAM
CHART
INSTALLER:USERS
USERS
USER CODE
P1E
USERS
USER TYPE
P2E
USERS
USER AREAS
P3E
USERS
USR ACCESS OPTS P4E
USERS
USR PROG OPTS
P5E
USERS
PENDANT TYPE
P7E
USERS
PENDANT OPTS
P8E
USERS
USR TIME ZONES
P9E
USERS
USR DEVICES
P10E
USERS
RADIO PANIC BP P11E
USERS
USR OUTPUT MASK
P12E
USERS
USR OUTPUTS ON
P13E
USERS
RADIO PANIC OP
P15E
USERS
PENDANT LEARN P18E
USERS
PENDANT DELETE P19E
USERS
PENDANT FIND
P20E
USERS
USR OUTPUTS OFF P14E
USERS
TAG DELETE
P22E
USERS
TAG FIND
USERS
TAG LEARN
P21E
P23E
CLOCK SETTINGS
CLOCK SETTINGS
TIME HH:MM
P26E
CLOCK SETTINGS
DLS HOUR
P29E
CLOCK SETTINGS
WEEK DAY 1-7
P26E
CLOCK SETTINGS
HOLIDAY DDMMY
P170E
DLS = daylight saving
CLOCK SETTINGS
DATE DDMMYY
CLOCK SETTINGS
TZ DAYS
P26E
CLOCK SETTINGS
DLS STATUS
P26E
CLOCK SETTINGS
DLS SUNDAY
P27E
CLOCK SETTINGS
DLS MONTH
P28E
P171E
CLOCK SETTINGS
TZ START
P172E
CLOCK SETTINGS
TZ END
P173E
CLOCK SETTINGS
TZ OPTIONS
P174E
PHONE NUMBERS
PH B REPORTING
P187E
TZ = time zones
PHONE NUMBERS
PHONE NUMBERS
PHONE NUMBER
P181E
PHONE NUMBERS
PHONE FORMAT
P182E
PHONE NUMBERS
PHONE OPTIONS
P183E
PHONE NUMBERS
PHONE RETRIES
P184E
PHONE NUMBERS
PH A REPORTING
P186E
PHONE NUMBERS
PH C REPORTING
P188E
PHONE NUMBERS
PH D REPORTING
P189E
PHONE NUMBERS
DIVERT EVENTS
P192E
PHONE NUMBERS
DIVERT OPTIONS
P193E
PHONE NUMBERS
DIVERT NUM
P194E
P175E
DIALLER
DIALLER B OPTION
P175E
DIALLER
AUTO RING COUNT
P175E
DIALLER
TEST RESYNC HHMM
P175E
DIALLER
TEST PERIOD
P175E
DIALLER
KP LISTEN IN
P175E
DIALLER
OP 1 LISTEN IN
P175E
DIALLER
PREFIX NUMBER
P175E
DIALLER
PANIC CID CODE
P175E
DIALLER
FIRE CID CODE
P175E
DIALLER
MEDI CID CODE
P175E
DIALLER
OUTPUT DTMF
P175E
DIALLER
MONITOR DTMF
P175E
DIALLER
DTMF ACK. CODE
P175E
DIALLER
DTMF CALL CODE
P175E
DIALLER
PANIC MESSAGE
P176E
DIALLER
FIRE MESSAGE
P176E
DIALLER
MEDICAL MESSAGE
P176E
DIALLER
AC FAIL MESSAGE
P176E
DIALLER
AC RESTORE MSG
P176E
DIALLER
BATTERY LOW MSG
P176E
DIALLER
BATTERY OK MSG
P176E
P176E
DIALLER
DURESS MESSAGE
P176E
DIALLER
LATCH KEY MSG
P176E
DIALLER
REMOTE TEST MSG
DIALLER
DIALLER
DIALLER A OPTION
P176E
34
DIALLER
TAMPER MESSAGE
AREAS
AREAS
AREA A OPTIONS
P45E
AREAS
AREA B OPTIONS
P46E
AREAS
AREA ARM FOLLOW
P47E
AREAS
AREA STAY FOLLOW
P48E
AREAS
AREA OPEN FOLLOW
P49E
AREAS
AREA ARM CHIRP
P50E
AREAS
AREA STAY CHIRP
P51E
AREAS
AREA OPEN CHIRP
P52E
AREAS
AREA UNSTAY CHRP
P53E
AREAS
AREA ARM PULSE
P54E
AREAS
AREA STAY PULSE
P55E
AREAS
AREA OPEN PULSE
P56E
AREAS
AREA UNSTAY PLS
P57E
AREAS
AREA ARM EXIT BP
P58E
AREAS
AREA STAY EXIT B
P59E
AREAS
AREA ARM EXIT TM
P60E
AREAS
AREA STAY EXIT TM
P61E
AREAS
AREA ACCOUNT CD
P62E
P63E
AREAS
AREA MESSAGES
P64E
AREAS
AREA EXIT-OP A
P65E
AREAS
AREA EXIT-OP S
P66E
AREAS
AREA DELNQ.DAYS
P67E
AREAS
AREA DTMF CODE
AREAS
AREA ARM TZ
P68E
ZONES-MAIN
ZONES-MAIN
ZN AREAS
ZONES-MAIN
ZN RADIO TYPE
P121E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN A OPTIONS
P122E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN B OPTIONS
ZONES-MAIN
ZN C OPTIONS
P123E
P124E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN EOL MODE
P125E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN RESPONSE
P126E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN ARM BEEPS
P134E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN STAY BEEPS P135E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN 24HR BEEPS P136E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN CHIME BEEPS P137E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN TAMP BEEPS P139E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN SUPV BEEPS P140E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN ACTV BP
P141E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN ARM ENT BP P142E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN STAY ENT BP P143E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN ARM ENT TM P144E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN STAY ENT TM P145E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN LOCKOUT TM P146E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN AL CID CODE P157E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN NEAR AL CID P158E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN CONF.AL CID P159E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN ALM VOICE MSGP160E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN LEARN RADIO P164E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN DEL RADIO
ZONES-MAIN
FIND RADIO
P127E
P165E
ZONES-MAIN
ZN ACT TMR
P163E
P166E
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZN ARM OUTS P128E
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZN STAY OUTS P129E
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZN 24HR OUTS P130E
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZN CHIME OUTS P131E
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZN TAMPER OUTSP132E
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZN ENTRY OP/AWAYP161E
KEYPADS
KP KEYS
KEYPADS
KP BEEPS
KEYPADS
KP ARM AREAS
P74E
KEYPADS
KP ARM ACCESS P75E
KEYPADS
KP STAY AREAS
ZONES-OUTPUTS
ZN ENTRY OP/STAY P162E
KEYPADS
KEYPADS
KP AREAS
P71E
P72E
P73E
P76E
KEYPADS
KP STAY ACCESS P77E
KEYPADS
KP A KEY AREAS P78E
KEYPADS
KP A KEY OPTNS P79E
KEYPADS
KP B KEY AREAS P80E
KEYPADS
KP B KEY OPTNS P81E
KEYPADS
KP USR OP MSK
P82E
KEYPADS
KP CONTRL MSK P83E
KEYPADS
KP PANIC OUTS
P84E
KEYPADS
KP FIRE OUTS
P85E
KEYPADS
KP MEDI OUTS
P86E
KEYPADS
KP DURESS OUTS P87E
KEYPADS
KP TAMP OUTS
P88E
KEYPADS
KP ERROR OUTS P89E
KEYPADS
KP PANIC BP
P90E
KEYPADS
KP FIRE BP
P91E
KEYPADS
KP MEDI BP
P92E
KEYPADS
KP TAMP BP
KEYPADS
KP CHIME TMR
P94E
KEYPADS
READER LEARN
P99E
KEYPADS
PROX LED FOLLOWSP98E
35
P93E
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
OP A OPTIONS
P34E
OUTPUTS
OP B OPTIONS
P35E
OUTPUTS
OP C OPTIONS
P36E
OUTPUTS
OP D OPTIONS
P37E
OUTPUTS
OP DELAY TIME
OUTPUTS
OP RESET TIME
P40E
OUTPUTS
OP CHIME TIME
P41E
OUTPUTS
OP MESSAGES
P42E
OUTPUTS
UN-MAP OP
P43E
OUTPUTS
TIMEZONES TO OP P44E
P38E
OUTPUTS
OP FLASH TIME
P39E
KEYSWITCH
KEYSWITCH
KEYSW AREAS
P111E
KEYSWITCH
KEYSW ACCESS P112E
MISCELLANEOUS
MISCELLANEOUS
INSTALLER CODE P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
DURESS DIGIT
P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
REPORTING DELAY P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
SUPERVISED TIMER P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
TWO TRIGGER TIME P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
RADIO RESET TIMEP25E
MISCELLANEOUS
SECURITY CODE P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
TEMP O/P DISABLE P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
MISC OPTIONS
P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
INSTALLER OPTS P25E
MISCELLANEOUS
AC FAIL DELAY
P25E
4+2 EVENT CODES
4+2 EVENT CODES
USR ARM 4+2
P16E
4+2 EVENT CODES
USR OPEN 4+2
P17E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ZN ALARM 4+2 P147E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ZN RESTORE 4+2 P148E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ZN NEAR ALM 4+2P149E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ZN NEAR RST 4+2 P150E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ZN CONF.ALM 4+2P151E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ZN CONF.RST 4+2 P152E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ZN BYPASS 4+2 P155E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ZN UNBYP 4+2
P156E
4+2 EVENT CODES
AC FAIL 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
AC OK 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
BATTERY LOW 4+2P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
BATTERY OK 4+2 P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
TAMPER 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
TAMPER RESET 4+2P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
REMOTE ARM 4+2 P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
REMOTE OPEN 4+2P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
DURESS 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
TEST CALL 4+2 P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ARM BUTTON 4+2 P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
STAY MODE 4+2 P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
ARM/STAY OFF 4+2P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
KS ARM 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
KS OPEN 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
T/Z ARM FAIL 4+2 P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
KP PANIC 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
KP PANIC OK 4+2 P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
KP FIRE 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
KP FIRE OK 4+2 P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
KP MEDI 4+2
P195E
4+2 EVENT CODES
KP MEDI OK 4+2 P195E
SIA EVENTS
SIA MEDICAL
DIAGNOSTICS
BATTERY VOLTAGEP200E
DIAGNOSTICS
WALK TEST MODE P200E
DIAGNOSTICS
CLEAR MEM BUFFERP200E
DIAGNOSTICS
START CALLBACKP200E
SIA EVENTS
SIA EVENTS
ZN AL SIA CODE P196E
SIA EVENTS
SIA PANIC
P197E
SIA EVENTS
SIA FIRE
DIAGNOSTICS
THIS KEYPAD
P200E
DIAGNOSTICS
AREAS FOR KEYPADP200E
P197E
P200E
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
PANEL VERSION P200E
DIAGNOSTICS
WRITE TO EEPROMP200E
DIAGNOSTICS
READ FROM EEPROMP200E
DIAGNOSTICS
CLEAR USER/PHONEP200E
DIAGNOSTICS
ACTIVE TIMEZONESP200E
DIAGNOSTICS
CLEAR ALL
36
P200E
SPECIAL KEYPAD OPERATING FEATURES
ARMING or DISARMING TWO AREAS at a KEYPAD
If the panel is configured for two Areas “A&B”, and the option “ARM” button required before code is turned on (P45E
Option 1), there are a number of possible arming options.
If a user code is only assigned to one area and they press <ARM> <CODE> <ENTER> at the keypad, only the Area assigned to their code will Arm.
If a user code is assigned to both areas but the keypad being used is only assigned to one area, pressing <ARM>
<CODE> <ENTER> will only arm the area assigned to the keypad.
If a user code is assigned to both areas, the keypad being used is also assigned to both areas, plus the ARM button is
assigned to both Areas (P74E), pressing <ARM> <CODE> <ENTER> will put the keypad into a “Ready to Arm” state. On
the LCD keypad the display will show “Area/s to Arm” “A B”, and on the LED keypad LED’s 1 & 2 (LED 1 = Area A & LED 2
= Area B) will turn on.
If you press the <ENTER> button now, both areas A&B will arm. If before pressing the enter button you wish to deselect
one of the Areas eg if you only want to arm area B press the number “1” and Area “A” will disappear on the LCD keypad
display or the number “1” will turn off on the LED keypad indicating that only area B will arm when the enter button is
pressed.
The number “1” will toggle area A on/off and the number “2” will toggle area B on/off.
If you don’t do anything the panel will proceed with arming both areas after 10 seconds time has elapsed.
On disarming, after entering <CODE> <ENTER> the display on the LCD keypad will show “Area/s to Disarm” “A B”, and
on the LED keypad LED’s 1 & 2. You can press the <ENTER> button at this point to disarm both areas, select which area
you wish to disarm by using the numbers 1 & 2 on the keypad, or if you don’t do anything the panel will proceed with
disarming both areas after 10 seconds time has elapsed.
LCD QUICKVIEW MODE
If any zones are unsealed when disarmed the LCD keypad will scroll through each unsealed zone displaying the 16 character name for each zone. If a number of zones are unsealed simultaneously it can take sometime for the display to
show all of the unsealed zones. By pressing the <ENTER> button when zones are unsealed the keypad will enter the
“Quick-view” mode. When in “Quick-view” mode, each unsealed zone is displayed as a single two digit number eg “01
05 10”. Up to 5 unsealed zones maybe displayed at one time. If more than 5 zones are unsealed at the time the display
will scroll to the next bank of 5 zones so the user can see quickly which zones are unsealed. To exit “Quick-view” mode
you simply press the <ENTER> button again or the keypad will time out automatically in approximately 30 seconds.
TOGGLE CHIME MODE ON/OFF
On the Landscape LCD Keypad there is a “CHIME” button. Pressing and holding that button for two seconds will toggle
Chime Mode from On-Off or Off-On. On the Portrait LCD keypad or the LED Keypads, there is no chime button so the
Control & Program buttons are used. By pressing and holding the <CONTROL> button then within 2 seconds also
pressing the <PROGRAM> button, you will toggle Chime Mode from On-Off or Off-On. On the LED keypad the “AUX(0)”
LED will turn on when chime mode is off.
SEND MANUAL TEST CALL
If the panel is configured for Contact ID reporting and test calls are programmed to report, you can force a manual test
call by pressing and holding <CONTROL> followed within 2 seconds by <0>. This will cause a manual test call to be
sent to the monitoring company. You can also dial into the panel from a remote site and using the telephone cause a
manual test call remotely. See P175E15E and P176E11E for details.
MANUALLY ANSWER AN INCOMING CALL
If the panel is not configured to answer in-coming calls, the user can force it to answer the call by pressing and holding
<CONTROL> followed within 2 seconds by <9>. This will make the panel answer the call immediately. For this function
to work the phone line must be ringing at the time and there must have been at least two rings before pressing the buttons.
37
USER PROGRAMMING
USER CODES - P1E 1-100E (NOTE: Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)
Note: Where there are up to 8 options at one address, the digits 0 & 9 have special functions. Entering
a 0 at the address will turn all options off whereas entering a 9 will turn all options on.
Adding or changing a User Code
Up to 100 codes can be programmed into the panel. The user codes are located in address P1E 1-100E.
By default, Code 1 has Master Code permissions and must be used to enter Client program mode.
Codes 1-100 may be varied in length from 1 to 6 digits (unless option 8 at P25E11E is on then the codes must be
between 4-6 digits long).
To program a User Code you must first be in client or installer program mode, then select the address P1E followed
by the User Number you wish to program eg 1-100E (If there is already a code programmed at this address, it will be
displayed back to you) Now enter the code then press the <ENTER> key.
eg. P1E2E 2580 E
3 beeps - program light on solid or flashing
In this example we have programmed Code 2 to be 2580.
eg. P1E5E 9876 E
3 beeps - program light on solid or flashing
In this example we have programmed code 5 to be 9876
To replace a code simply enter the new code in the same address as the old code. This will overwrite the previous
code but maintain the user permissions as mapped to that user number.
NOTE: When displaying User Codes on an LED keypad, digits 1-9 use the zone indicators 1-9. The digit 0 is indicated
by the "AUX” light.
Removing a User Code
To remove or delete a code simply press the <BYPASS> button after entering the code address when using an LED
keypad, or press and hold the <CONTROL> button then within 2 seconds press the <0> button if using an LCD
keypad.
eg. LED Keypad press P1E3E <BYPASS> E
3 beeps - Program light on solid or flashing
User Code # 3 Erased
eg. LCD Keypad press P1E3E <CONTROL> then <0>
3 beeps
User Code # 3 Erased
USER CODE TYPE
USER CODE TYPE - P2E 1-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)
Option 0 - Keypad Code User {PIN}
Option 1 - Radio user (User 21-100 only)
Option 2 - Access Tag/Card User
Option 3 - Both Code and Access Tag/Card User {Tag + PIN}
Option 4 - Either Code or Access Tag/Card User {Tag or PIN}
Option 0
Keypad Code User {PIN} - All 100 Users can be 1-6 digit code Users if required. Codes can be used to
Arm/Disarm all or part of the alarm or they can be used to operate outputs for access control purposes.
Users can be assigned to keypads and so can outputs so that a User assigned to multiple outputs
(which can in turn be linked to doors) can operate only the door assigned to the keypad they are using.
38
Option 1
Radio User - Users 21-100 can be Radio keys (Pendant) if required. Radio keys can be used to Arm/Disarm
all or part of the alarm or they can operate outputs directly. Unlike user codes, a radio key cannot be
assigned to a keypad so if a radio key is assigned to more than one output and the radio key is operated, all
of the outputs assigned to the radio key will turn on.
Option 2
Access Tag/Card User - Users 1-100 can be Access Tags or Cards if required. Access Tag or Card operation
requires that the optional Proximity Reader is connected to the panel. The Proximity Readers can be
assigned to any one of the 8 possible keypad addresses. Access tag or Card Users can be used to Arm/Disarm
all or part of the alarm or they can be used to operate outputs for access control purposes. Access Tags or
Cards can be assigned to a keypad address and so can outputs so that an Access User assigned to multiple
outputs (which can in turn be linked to doors) can operate only the door assigned to the keypad address
they are using.
Option 3
Both Code and Access Tag/Card User {Tag + PIN} - Up to 100 code Users and up 100 tag or card Users can
be stored in the panel. If the Proximity Reader with the full keypad is installed on the panel, it is possible to
arm/disarm the alarm or gain access through a door by presenting the tag/card at the reader then entering
in the user code {PIN Number}. It MUST be in that order ie Tag then PIN. This option provides a more secure
means of arming or disarming the alarm, or gaining access through a door, because it requires both the
access tag/card plus the PIN number.
Option 4
Either Code or Access Tag/Card User {Tag or PIN} - Up to 100 code Users and up 100 tag or card Users can
be stored in the panel. If the Proximity Reader with the full keypad is installed on the panel, it is possible to
arm/disarm the alarm or gain access through a door by entering in the user code at the reader or presenting
the tag/card at the reader. This option gives two methods of controlling the alarm.
USER AREAS
USER AREAS - P3E 1-100E
Option 1 - Assigned to Area A
Option 2 - Assigned to Area B
Option 1
Assigned to Area A - If a User has option 1 on, they can Arm/Disarm all zones assigned to Area A
Option 2
Assigned to Area B - If a User has option 2 on, they can Arm/Disarm all zones assigned to Area B
USER CODE ACCESS OPTIONS
USER ACCESS OPTIONS - P4E 1-100E
Option 1 - User can Arm Area
Option 2 - User can Arm Stay Area
Option 3 - User can Disarm Area
Option 4 - User can Disarm Stay Area
Option 5 - User is a Security Guard User
Option 6 - User will Arm Latchkey Mode
Option 7 - User can set Call Divert Mode on Arm/Disarm
Option 8 - User can View Event Memory
Option 1
User can Arm Area - If a User has option 1 on, they can Arm all Areas assigned at location P3E.
Option 2
User can Arm Stay Area - If a User has option 2 on, they can Arm Stay Mode for all Areas assigned at location
P3E.
Option 3
User can Disarm Area - If a User has option 3 on, they can Disarm all Areas assigned at location P3E.
Option 4
User can Disarm Stay Area - If a User has option 4 on, they can Disarm Stay Mode for all Areas assigned at
location P3E.
Option 5
User is a Security Guard User - If a User has option 5 on, they can Arm all Areas assigned at location P3E, but
they may only Disarm if the panel is currently Armed and in the alarm state.
Option 6
User will Arm Latchkey Mode - If this option is ON, the User will Arm the alarm in Latchkey Mode. Latchkey
Mode can also be armed by using the <ARM>, <STAY>, <A> or <B> buttons, (see P75E, P77E, P79E & P81E
39
option 6) or the key-switch (see P112E option 6). If a User with this option ON Disarms the alarm no
Latchkey Disarm report will be sent via the dialler. If Latchkey Mode is Armed and a user with this
option turned OFF Disarms the alarm a Latchkey disarm report will be sent to alert parents when their
children have returned home. Reporting of Latchkey Disarm is enabled at location (P189E option 1). If a
Voice report is desired the message is assigned at P176E10E. Normally you would select a telephone
number/s set for domestic or voice reporting to report the Latchkey disarm signal.
Option 7
User can set Call Divert Mode on Arm/Disarm - If a User has option 7 on, they can initiate the Call
Divert Number/s to be dialled on Arm/Disarm. This allows automatic call diversion when the alarm is
Armed and taking the diversion off when Disarmed. Call divert must also be programmed (P192-194E).
Option 8
User can View Event Memory - If access to memory mode is restricted by turning on option 8 at
location P25E13E, this option allows the user to access memory mode by pressing <MEMORY> <CODE
#> <ENTER>. If this option is off and memory access is restricted, the user cannot view memory mode.
USER CODE PRIVILEGES
USER CODE PRIVILEGES - P5E 1-100E (see chart on page 114 for the exact program locations)
Option 1 - User can Change Their Code
Option 2 - User can Change All Codes
Option 3 - User can Allow Access to Installer Mode/Edit All Codes
Option 4 - User can Change Telephone Numbers
Option 5 - User can Change Clock Settings
Option 6 - User can Change DTMF Codes
Option 7 - User can Learn New Radio Devices
Option 8 - User can Force a Download to the Call-back Number
Option 1
User can Change Their Code - If a User has option 1 on, they can access Client Program Mode and
change their code number.
Option 2
User can Change All Codes - If a User has option 2 on, they can access Client Program Mode and
change All User code numbers.
Option 3
User can Allow access to Installer Mode/Edit All Codes - If a User has option 3 on, they can access
Client program Mode. From there an Installer with the correct Installer Code can access Installer
Program Mode. The User with this option can also edit all User Codes and associated parameters as
shown in the chart on page 112.
Option 4
User can Change Telephone Numbers - If a User has option 4 on, they can access Client Program Mode
and change the telephone and call divert numbers.
Option 5
User can Change Clock Settings - If a User has option 5 on, they can access Client Program Mode and
change the Time & date settings as well as daylight saving sart and finish times.
Option 6
User can Change DTMF Codes - If a User has option 6 on, they can access Client Program Mode and
change the DTMF Codes. A DTMF Code can be used to remotely Arm/Disarm an Area, turn Output/s On/
Off or Acknowledge a Voice/Domestic alarm.
Option 7
User can Learn New Radio Devices - If a User has option 7 on, they can access Client Program Mode
and Learn a new Radio Key or Wireless Zone Device. They can also remove radio devices or find what
location number a device is stored at.
Option 8
User can Force a Download to the Call-back Number - If a User has option 8 on, they can access Client
Program Mode and force a PC connection to a pre-defined call-back number. They can either enter in
P200E12E or if using an LCD keypad go to the “Diagnostics” Menu and select “Start Callback”.
RADIO USER TYPE
RADIO USER TYPE - P7E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)
Option 0 - Generic (General Pendant Type)
Option 1 - Crow Freelink Pendant
40
Option 21
Option 0
Ness Pendant
Generic Type - If a Radio Pendant has no special functions and does not send a battery low signal it is a
Generic type 0.
Option 1
Crow Freelink Type - If a Crow Freelink Radio Pendant is being used set the type to 1. When the
pendant detects a battery low it will send a signal to the panel.
Option 21
Ness Type - If a Ness Radio Pendant is being used set the type to 21. When the pendant detects a
battery low it will send a signal to the panel.
RADIO USER PRIVILEGES
RADIO USER PRIVILEGES - P8E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)
Option 1 - Pendant can Disarm at All Times
Option 2 - Pendant will cause an Immediate Panic Alarm
Option 3 - Pendant will cause a Delayed Panic Alarm (1.5 sec)
Option 4 - Pendant only works during entry delay
Option 5 - This User is a dedicated Duress Code
Option 6-8 - Spare
Option 1
Pendant can Disarm at All Times - If a Radio Pendant has option 1 on, they can Disarm the alarm at any
time. If this option is off, the pendant cannot disarm if the panel is in alarm state.
Option 2
Pendant will cause an Immediate Panic Alarm - If a Radio Pendant has option 2 on, a Panic Alarm will
be generated immediately the button is pressed.
Option 3
Pendant will cause a Delayed Panic Alarm - If a Radio Pendant has option 3 on, a Panic Alarm will be
generated if the button is pressed for longer that 1.5 seconds. If the button is released before the time
expires, no Panic Alarm will be generated.
Option 4
Pendant only works during entry delay - If a Radio Pendant has option 4 on, the pendant can only
disarm the alarm during the entry delay time. This means that authorised radio key users must enter
the building and trigger the entry delay before they can disarm the alarm.
Option 5
This User is a dedicated Duress Code - If a User Code has option 5 on (restricted to Users 21-100 only),
this code should be used as a dedicated Duress code. It should not be used for daily
disarming of
the alarm but used when disarming under Duress.
TIME ZONE ASSIGNED to a USER
TIME ZONE ASSIGNED to a USER - P9E 1-100E
Option 1 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 1
Option 2 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 2
Option 3 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 3
Option 4 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 4
Option 5 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 5
Option 6 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 6
Option 7 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 7
Option 8 - User Controlled by Time Zone # 8
There are up to 8 Time Zones that can be programmed into the panel. A Time Zone consists of a Start and Stop time
plus the Days of the Week that the Time Zone is active. By selecting Options 1-8 (function turned on) to a particular
User, that user will only operate if the Time Zone assigned is active.
For example, if Time Zone #1 had a start time of 0800 and a stop time of 1700 and active days of 2-6 (MondayFriday), a User with Time Zone 1 assigned can only be used between the hours of 0800-1700 from Monday to Friday.
Outside these hours the User Code will not operate.
More than one Time Zone can be assigned to a User. Using the above example for TZ#1 and now assuming Time
Zone #2 is set to 0900-1200 on day 7 (Saturday), by assigning both TZ1 & 2 to a User will now mean their code is
active during weekdays from 0800-1700 plus they are also able to use their code on Saturdays between the hours of
0900-1200. If the time-zone has just been programmed and should currently be active you will have to wait until the
next minute expires before the panel will update the time-zone status. You can see if the time-zone is active at
location P200E4E.
41
USER to KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT
USER to KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT - P10E 1-100E
Option 1 - User will work at Keypad # 1
Option 2 - User will work at Keypad # 2
Option 3 - User will work at Keypad # 3
Option 4 - User will work at Keypad # 4
Option 5 - User will work at Keypad # 5
Option 6 - User will work at Keypad # 6
Option 7 - User will work at Keypad # 7
Option 8 - User will work at Keypad # 8
Any user can be assigned to only operate at certain Keypads. This option controls whether a code or access tag User
can Arm/Disarm from certain keypads. This option does not restrict users from operating outputs from a particular
keypad (this is done at locations P82E & P83E).
RADIO PENDANT PANIC BEEPS to KEYPAD
RADIO PENDANT PANIC BEEPS to KEYPAD - P11E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)
Option 1 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 1
Option 2 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 2
Option 3 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 3
Option 4 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 4
Option 5 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 5
Option 6 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 6
Option 7 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 7
Option 8 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Beep at Keypad # 8
If a Radio Pendant is programmed to create a Panic Alarm (see P8E), when the Panic Alarm is activated it can be silent
or it can sound the keypad buzzer. Each keypad can be silent during a Pendant Panic Alarm (option turned off) or can
give an audible indication of the Alarm (option turned on).
USER to OUTPUT MASK
USER to OUTPUT MASK - P12E 1-100E
Option 1 - User is Mapped to Output # 1
Option 2 - User is Mapped to Output # 2
Option 3 - User is Mapped to Output # 3
Option 4 - User is Mapped to Output # 4
Option 5 - User is Mapped to Output # 5
Option 6 - User is Mapped to Output # 6
Option 7 - User is Mapped to Output # 7
Option 8 - User is Mapped to Output # 8
Any user can be allowed to only operate certain Outputs. This Function is mainly used for access control purposes. If
an Output is being used to open a door but a User does not have access through that door, by not allowing the User
to operate that Output access through the door can be denied.
USER can turn an OUTPUT ON
USER can turn an OUTPUT ON - P13E 1-100E
Option 1 - User can turn ON Output # 1
Option 2 - User can turn ON Output # 2
Option 3 - User can turn ON Output # 3
Option 4 - User can turn ON Output # 4
Option 5 - User can turn ON Output # 5
Option 6 - User can turn ON Output # 6
Option 7 - User can turn ON Output # 7
Option 8 - User can turn ON Output # 8
42
Any user can be allowed to turn an Output ON. This Function can be used to control external devices via the panel
keypad with a User assigned to that Output. Once an Output is turned ON by a User, the Output can turn OFF again
automatically if a reset time is assigned to the Output, or it can be turned off by the same user or by a different user
with the next program location.
USER can turn an OUTPUT OFF
USER can turn an OUTPUT OFF - P14E 1-100E
Option 1 - User can turn OFF Output # 1
Option 2 - User can turn OFF Output # 2
Option 3 - User can turn OFF Output # 3
Option 4 - User can turn OFF Output # 4
Option 5 - User can turn OFF Output # 5
Option 6 - User can turn OFF Output # 6
Option 7 - User can turn OFF Output # 7
Option 8 - User can turn OFF Output # 8
Any user can be allowed to turn an Output OFF. This Function can be used to control external devices via the panel
keypad with a User assigned to that Output. Once an Output is turned OFF by a User, the Output can be turned on by
the same user or by a different user with the previous program location.
RADIO PENDANT PANIC ALARM to OUTPUT
RADIO PENDANT PANIC ALARM to OUTPUT - P15E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Users)
Option 1 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 1
Option 2 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 2
Option 3 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 3
Option 4 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 4
Option 5 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 5
Option 6 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 6
Option 7 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 7
Option 8 - A Pendant Panic Alarm will Operate Output # 8
If a Radio Pendant is programmed to create a Panic Alarm (see P8E), when the Panic Alarm is activated it can be silent
or it can turn on an Output. This option would normally be used to turn on any internal and/or external audible
alarms connected to Outputs during a Pendant Panic Alarm.
LEARN RADIO PENDANT CODES
LEARN RADIO PENDANT CODES - P18E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Pendants)
A Radio Pendant must be enrolled into the panel before it can be used.
To learn a Radio Pendant you must first have a compatible receiver connected to the panel keypad buss. With the
receiver connected and the panel in program mode, entering P18E then the pendant number you wish to enrol, eg
21E for pendant 21, the keypad will start to beep to indicate that learn mode has been started and the LED on the
receiver will flash. Now operate the pendant you wish to learn into User slot 21. Once the transmitted code has been
received by the panel and saved as pendant 21, the keypad will stop beeping and the LED on the receiver will stop
flashing. When learning a new radio code the panel checks all possible locations (including radio zones) before saving
the new code to ensure that the code has not already been loaded into another slot. If the code already exists, the
keypad will indicate which slot the code is already installed at. A number from 1-16 indicates a zone slot and a
number from 21-100 indicates a user slot.
DELETE a RADIO PENDANT CODE
DELETE a RADIO PENDANT CODE - P19E 21-100E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Pendants)
If you wish to delete a single Radio Pendant, pressing P19E then the Pendant User number while in Program Mode will
delete the stored code against that User, eg P19E 21E will remove the code stored for User 21.
43
FIND a RADIO PENDANT LOCATION
FIND a RADIO PENDANT LOCATION - P20E 0E (NOTE: only Users 21-100 can be Radio Pendants)
If you have a Radio Pendant loaded into the panel but are unsure which location (User #), pressing P20E (then 0E on
an LED Keypad) while in Program Mode will start “Find” Mode. There is no need to press 0E when using an LCD keypad
because the keypad will give you written prompts after entering P20E. The keypad will start to beep to indicate that
“Find” mode has been started and the LED on the Receiver will flash. Now press the Radio Pendant button that you
wish to find. If the Radio Pendant is in memory the keypad will display the number (1-16 indicates a zone, and 21-100
indicates a user). The keypad will stop beeping and the LED on the Receiver will stop flashing.
LEARN ACCESS TAG/CARD CODES
LEARN ACCESS TAG/CARD CODES - P21E 1-100E
An Access Tag/Card must be enrolled into the panel before it can be used. The panel can have up to 100 proximity
tags (key-ring style card), or proximity cards loaded into the system. The tags or cards are stored separately to the
User Codes but they follow the options of Users 1-100 programmed at locations P2E, P3E, P4E, P9E, P10E, P12E, P13E &
P14E. For example if user 11 is assigned to area A (P3E Option 1), and can arm/disarm the alarm (P4E Options 1 & 3),
then access Tag/Card number 11 will arm/disarm area A also.
To learn an Access Tag/Card you must first have a compatible proximity reader connected to the panel keypad buss.
With the reader connected and the panel in program mode, entering P21E then the Access tag/card number you wish
to enrol, eg 11E for Tag/Card number 11, the keypad will start to beep to indicate that learn mode has been started.
Now present the Access Tag/card to the reader. Once the Tag/Card number has been received by the panel and saved,
the keypad will stop beeping to indicate learn mode has stopped. When learning a new access Tag/Card the panel
checks all possible locations before saving the new code to ensure that the code has not already been loaded. If the
tag or card already exists, the panel will not terminate learn mode but instead it will continue looking for a new tag or
card to be presented. This allows a new tag or card to be learnt while existing tags or cards may be in use on the
system. After learning the tag or card, before it will work you MUST select the appropriate option at location P2E
(options 2, 3 or 4 must be selected for the tag to work).
DELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODE
DELETE an ACCESS TAG/CARD CODE - P22E 1-100E
If you wish to delete a single Access Tag or Card, pressing P22E then the User number while in Program Mode will
delete the stored code against that User, eg P22E 11E will remove the tag or Card stored for User 11.
FIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATION
FIND an ACCESS TAG/CARD LOCATION - P23E 0E
If you have an Access Tag or Card loaded into the panel but are unsure which location (User #), pressing P22E (then 0E
on an LED Keypad) while in Program Mode will start “Find” Mode. There is no need to press 0E when using an LCD
keypad because the keypad will give you written prompts after entering P22E. The keypad will start to beep to
indicate that “Find” mode has been started. Now present the Access Tag or Card you wish to find to a proximity reader
connected to the panel. If the Tag or Card is in memory the keypad will display the number where the Tag or Card is
stored (a number from 1-100). The keypad will stop beeping once the memory location has been found.
MISCELLANEOUS PANEL & CLOCK SETTINGS
INSTALLER CODE
INSTALLER CODE - P25E 1E
This code is used to enter full Installer Program mode (Program LED flashing on LED Keypad). The default installer
code is 000000. This code can only be changed while in Installer Program Mode. To enter your new installer code
press P25E1E. The existing code will displayed at the keypad (either each digit flashed out sequentially on an LED
keypad or shown on the bottom line of the LCD keypad). To change the code simply enter the digits of the new code
and it will replace the old one. The Installer Code must be between 4-6 digits in length.
44
DURESS DIGIT
DURESS DIGIT - P25E 2E (Value can be 1-9, 0 = Duress Disabled)
The duress digit can be a number from 1-9 (a value of “0” means the duress function is disabled).
To create a duress alarm the duress digit must be entered before a valid user code (eg If the code was “123” and the
duress number was “4”, then entering a code of <4123> <ENTER> would create a duress alarm).
DIAL REPORT DELAY
DIAL REPORT DELAY - P25E 3E (0-255 Seconds)
If this address is set to 0, there will be no report delay. If it is set to any value other than 0 then a delay equal to the
programmed value will stop the panel from reporting an alarm until this delay time expires.
RADIO ZONE SUPERVISED TIMER
RADIO ZONE SUPERVISED TIMER - P25E 4E (Value 0-9999 Minutes)
If a radio detector is capable of sending regular supervisory signals to the panel and the zone type is set for
“Supervised Signal Active”, this timer sets how long a period has to elapse with no received transmissions before a
supervisory failure alarm is generated.
TWO TRIGGER TIMER
TWO TRIGGER TIMER - P25E 5E (0-255 Seconds)
If a zone is set to two trigger, the zone has to cause an alarm twice within the two trigger time period to cause an
alarm. If multiple zones are set to two trigger, an alarm will be generated it two zones trigger once each within the
two trigger time period. If a two trigger zone goes into alarm but remains in alarm for longer than the two trigger time
period (ie detector failure or cable cut) an alarm will be generated.
MAINS FAIL REPORTING DELAY
MAINS FAIL REPORTING DELAY - P25E 6E (0-9999 Seconds)
If a Mains Failure occurs this timer delays the reporting of Mains Failure to a Monitoring Station. If the mains power
returns before the timer expires then no report is sent. If Mains Failure is assigned to an output, this delay must expire
before the output will turn on.
RECEIVER FAIL DELAY
RECEIVER FAIL DELAY - P25E 7E (0-9999 Seconds)
If supervised radio detectors are used, the receiver will be seeing regular transmissions. Because of this, the panel can
monitor receiver activity to check that the receiver is still working. If the panel does not receive any signals within this
time period a receiver failure alarm will be generated. If set to 0, the receiver monitoring will be turned off.
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD SITE CODE NUMBER
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD SITE CODE NUMBER - P25E 8E (8 characters)
The upload/download site code number must be entered if the panel is set for auto-answer as this provides a security
access level to the panel. The number can be up to 8 characters in length. Valid characters for this number are 0-9,B-F.
See chart on page 55 for details of how to program the characters B-F.
45
TEMPORARY OUTPUT DISABLE
TEMPORARY OUTPUT DISABLE - P25E 9E (Select output # 1-8)
This address allows a technician to select any output/s to be temporarily disabled for one alarm or armed cycle, eg by
selecting LEDS 1-4 (Outputs 1-4) at this location then leaving program mode, outputs 1-4 will not turn on following
any alarms. The technician is now free to arm the system to test all monitoring signals without having any internal
and/or external alarms activating. When the alarm is reset or disarmed all outputs will now work normally again.
MISCELLANEOUS PANEL OPTIONS
MISCELLANEOUS PANEL OPTIONS - P25E 10E
Option 1 - Panel Tamper is 2k2 EOL
Option 2 - Direct access to program mode for the Installer Code
Option 3 - Disable Mains Fail Test
Option 4 - Listen-in to O/P # 1 Low Volume
Option 5 - Receiver Fail/RF Jammed Lockout
Option 6 - Send Output information to Keypad Buss
Option 7 - Cannot arm if the system battery is low.
Option 8 - Installer Lockout
Option 1
Panel Tamper is 2k2 EOL - The Tamper input (Tmp) on the control panel requires either a short circuit
or a 2k2 End-of-Line resistor. If option 1 is on the panel must see a 2k2 resistor (EOL) across the Tmp &
0V terminals to ensure the tamper is sealed. If this option is turned off then a simple short circuit is all
that is required to seal the panel tamper.
Option 2
Direct access to program mode for the Installer Code - If this option is on, the Installer Code can gain
access to Installer Program Mode directly. If the option is turned off, the installer can only gain access to
Installer Program Mode via Client Program Mode. This option allows the owner to control program
mode access by the installer. The User must have option 3 at location P5E turned on for them to allow
installer access.
Option 3
Disable Mains Fail Test - If the panel must be run off a DC supply or the Mains supply can fail regularly,
this option disables the mains voltage monitoring to prevent mains fail alarms from occurring.
Option 4
Listen-in to O/P # 1 Low Volume - If Listen-In to Output 1 is turned on (P175E8E), the level of sound
from the speaker can be controlled with this option. If this option is Off the sound level during listen-in
to O/P 1 is high volume, turning this option On makes the sound level low volume. For listen-in to
Output 1 to work the device connected to O/P 1 must be an 8Ώ speaker and the output must be
modulated (P35E1E Option 1 on). Failure to do this could result in damage to the speaker & output.
Receiver Fail/RF Jammed Lockout - If the receiver fail delay (P25E7E) is set to a value other than 0 and
the panel sees no activity from the receiver for the set period of time, a receiver fail alarm will be
generated. If this option is turned on, the panel cannot be armed until the cause of the receiver failure
has been resolved. Also if the receiver detects a continuous signal for longer than 60 seconds it will send
an RF Jammed signal to the control panel. Under this alarm condition and if this option is turned on, the
control panel cannot be armed until the interference has been removed.
Option 5
Option 6
Send Output information to Keypad Buss - There is an optional 4 x relay output expander board that
can be connected to the keypad buss if required. For this output expander to work option 6 must be
turned on for the data to be sent on the keypad buss to the expander.
Option 7
Cannot arm if the system battery is low. - If this option is turned on, the panel cannot be armed if the
panel battery is low. When the battery is fully charged the panel can then be armed. If this option is
turned off the panel can be armed during these fault conditions.
Option 8
Installer Lockout - Normally if the panel is powered up with the panel tamper open (ie system tamper
alarm active) and in the Disarm state, then the panel will go into installer program mode when the
<PROGRAM> then <ENTER> buttons are pressed. If this option is on, the panel will not allow access to
program mode on power-up and the only valid method of accessing program mode is via the installer
code.
46
INSTALLER OPTIONS
INSTALLER OPTIONS - P25E 11E
Option 1 - Entry to Installer Mode Resets Confirmed Alarms
Option 2 - Entry to Installer Mode Resets Tamper Alarms
Option 3 - Entry to Installer Mode Resets Low Battery Alarm
Option 4 - Entry to Installer Mode Resets Supervisory Alarms
Option 5 - Cannot Arm if there is a keypad Fault
Option 6 - Cannot Arm if there is a Telephone Line Failure or Comms Fault
Option 7 - 10 Incorrect Code Attempts locks out the keypad for 90 Seconds
Option 8 - User Codes Must be 4-6 digits long
Option 1
Entry to Installer Mode Resets Confirmed Alarms - If this option is turned on and a Confirmed alarm has
occurred, the alarm cannot be re-armed until the Installer has reset the alarm. The Installer must access
Installer Program Mode via Client Mode to reset the system. The zones that caused the alarm will latch
on (even when disarmed) until reset by the installer to indicate that lockout is in effect.
Option 2
Entry to Installer Mode Resets Tamper Alarms - If this option is turned on and a Tamper alarm has
occurred (system or zone tampers), the alarm cannot be re-armed until the Installer has reset the alarm.
The Installer must access Installer Program Mode via Client Mode to reset the system. The Trouble
indication will latch on (even if the tamper alarm has been cleared) until reset by the installer to
indicate that lockout is in effect.
Option 3
Entry to Installer Mode Resets Low Battery Alarm - If this option is turned on and a Low Battery alarm
has occurred, the Installer must access Installer Program Mode via Client Mode to reset the battery low
signal. If option 7 is turned on at location P25E10E the alarm cannot be re-armed until the Installer has
reset the battery low signal.
Option 4
Entry to Installer Mode Resets Supervisory Alarms - If this option is turned on and a Detector
Supervisory alarm has occurred, the alarm cannot be re-armed until the Installer has reset the alarm. The
Installer must access Installer Program Mode via Client Mode to reset the supervisory alarm.
Option 5
Cannot Arm if there is a keypad Fault - If this option is turned on and a missing keypad alarm is present
the panel cannot be armed until the keypad has been re-instated.
Option 6
Cannot Arm if there is a Telephone Line Failure or Comms Fault - If this option is turned on and the
control panel has detected a telephone line fault or the dialler failed to get kissed off (Comms Fault)
following an alarm report the panel cannot be armed. To reset the line failure the telephone line must be
re-instated to allow arming again. To reset the Comms Fault alarm, a user must access the memory.
Option 7
10 Incorrect Code Attempts locks out the keypad for 90 Seconds - If this option is turned off the panel
will create a keypad tamper alarm if more than 4 incorrect codes are entered at a keypad but the keypad
will not be locked out. If this option is turned on the panel will create a keypad tamper alarm if more
than 10 incorrect codes are entered at a keypad and that keypad will then be locked out for 90 seconds.
Option 8
User Codes Must be 4-6 Digits - If this option is turned on, all User Codes must be between 4-6 digits
long. If it is turned off, the User Codes can be 1-6 digits long.
USER OPTIONS
USER OPTIONS - P25E 12E (NOTE: This Option can ONLY be accessed from Client Mode)
Option 1 - Hide User Codes from Installer
Option 1
Hide User Codes from Installer - This option is only accessible from Client Program Mode. It is designed
to allow the User (owner) of the alarm to hide their User Codes from the Installer if desired. If this option
is turned On, codes can only be changed or viewed in Client program mode. Users MUST have option 2
at location P5E assigned before they can hide the user codes.
47
MISCELLANEOUS USER OPTIONS - P25E 13E
Option 1 - Code Required to View Memory
Option 2 - Cancel Handover Zone Function in Stay Mode
Option 3 - Output Control from Keypad is Disabled when Armed
Option 4 - Keypad Codes are Disabled During Entry Delay
Option 5 - No Keypad Indications while Armed
Option 6 - Monitored KP Buss Output Board
Option 7 - Enable Keypad Tamper Switch Alarms
Option 8 - Limit Events & Dialler to 3 of any one type
Option 1
Code Required to View Memory - If this option is turned on, access to Memory Mode will only be
allowed by using an authorised code. The user must press <MEMORY> <CODE #> <ENTER> to view
memory events Codes are authorised by turning on option 8 at location P4E. If this option is turned off
anyone can access memory mode.
Option 2
Cancel Handover Zone Function in Stay Mode - If this option is turned on, any zone programmed with
the handover feature will act as a normal delayed zone during Stay mode (ie the handover feature will be
ignored). The zone will still have the normal handover feature during the full arm state.
Option 3
Output Control from Keypad is Disabled when Armed - If this option is turned on any User code
programmed to operate an output for access control will be disabled when the area/s assigned to the
user code is/are armed (P3E). If the user code is assigned to area A but area B was armed the code can
still operate the output. If no areas are assigned at P3E this option has no effect on the User code.
Option 4
Keypad Codes are Disabled During Entry Delay - If this option is turned on no codes will operate during
the entry delay. This forces the user to disarm before entering the premises.
Option 5
No Keypad Indications while Armed - If this option is turned on and all areas assigned to keypads are
armed, the keypad display will be blank during the armed state. If any keypad is assigned to areas A&B at
location P71E, both areas must be armed before the display will go blank on arming.
Option 6
Monitored KP Buss Output Board - This option performs a similar function to option 6 at location
P25E10E in that if it is turned on the Output status messages are sent to the keypad buss. The difference
with this option is when turned on the panel is expecting the OUTPUTX4 board connected to the keypad
buss to acknowledge the messages. If the OUTPUTX4 does not acknowledge the output status messages
the panel will show an output board failure. This option should only be turned on if an OUTPUTX4 board
with the latest software is connected to the keypad buss.
Option 7
Enable Keypad Tamper Switch Alarms - If this option is turned off the panel will ignore all alarms
generated by keypad tamper switches. To enable the keypad tamper alarms this option must be turned
on.
Limit Events & Dialler to 3 of any one Type - If this option is turned on the panel will not record any
more than 3 events in memory for any event type during a single arm or disarm cycle, eg if the AC failed 4
times while armed or disarmed the panel will only record the AC fail 3 times in memory and will only
report the AC fail 3 times to the dialler. As soon as the arm state has changed any counts are reset back
to zero again. If this option is off there is no limit on the recording and reporting of events.
Option 8
SETTING REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK HOUR/MINUTE
REAL TIME CLOCK DAY of WEEK
REAL TIME CLOCK DATE/MONTH/YEAR
P26E 1E (Value 0-2359)
P26E 2E (Value 1-7) [where 1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, 3 = Tuesday, etc]
P26E 3E (Value DDMMYY) (for example 020904 = 2nd September, 2004)
The Real Time Clock controls the Time-zones, the timing of automatic test calls and is used to Time & Date stamp the
events in the Event Buffer. Ensure this is set correctly at the time of installation so that the all of the functions using the
time will work correctly. The clock is programmed in 24 hour format (eg 00:00-23:59).
DAYLIGHT SAVING (DLS) SETTINGS
DAYLIGHT SAVING ACTIVE -
P26E 4E (If LED # 1 is On, Daylight Saving is currently active)
NOTE: If you are in Daylight Saving Time when the alarm system is installed you MUST turn on option 1 at location
48
P26E4E so that the panel knows that Daylight Saving Time is currently active. Failure to do this will not allow the clock
to automatically adjust to the correct time when Daylight Saving Time Ends.
DAYLIGHT SAVING START SUNDAY - P27E 1E (Value 0-5, 0= DLS Disabled)
DAYLIGHT SAVING END SUNDAY P27E 2E (Value 0-5, 0= DLS Disabled)
DAYLIGHT SAVING START MONTH DAYLIGHT SAVING END MONTH -
P28E 1E (Value 1-12)
P28E 2E (Value 1-12)
DAYLIGHT SAVING START HOUR DAYLIGHT SAVING END HOUR -
P29E 1E (Value 0-23)
P29E 2E (Value 0-23)
If Daylight Saving (DLS) is used, the actual start and stop details can be entered here and the clock will automatically
adjust for daylight saving.
NOTE: If the start and/or stop Sunday (P27E above) must be the last Sunday of the month (which can be Sunday
number 4 or 5 depending on the year) then you must se the value to 5.
OUTPUTS
NOTE: With all output programming options we refer to outputs 1-8. Only outputs 1-4 are available as standard,
with outputs 5-8 requiring the connection of the optional 4 way output expander unit that connects to the
keypad buss ( the output expander provides 4 change-over relay contacts).
OUTPUT OPTIONS “A”
OUTPUT OPTIONS “A” - P34E 1-8E
Option 1 - Invert Output
Option 2 - Flash Output
Option 3 - Single Pulse to Output
Option 4 - Lockout Output
Option 5 - DTMF Remote Control of Output
Option 6 - Keypad User can Operate Output
Option 7 - <CONTROL> button can Operate Output
Option 8 - Pulsed Chime Alarm (linked to pulse timer)
Option 1
Invert Output - This option is used to invert the normal state of the output. The panel uses open
collector transistor switches and the default state of all outputs is off (open). When in alarm the
transistor is turned on and the output goes low (0V). The invert option reverses this function.
Option 2
Flash Output - When the output is turned on this option causes the output to flash at a rate set by the
pulse timer (P39E). One use is to flash a lamp during an alarm. DO NOT turn this option on if the Output
is to be manually controlled by a user or the “Control” button.
Option 3
Single Pulse to Output - This option produces a single pulse at the output when an alarm occurs (the
pulse time is the value programmed at the output pulse timer P39E).
Lockout Output - This option is used to limit the output to one operation per arming period.
Option 4
Option 5
DTMF Remote Control of Output - If the panel is set-up so a User can dial in from a remote telephone to
perform “DTMF Code Control” (P175E12E) of the Outputs, this option selects which Outputs are able to
be controlled by the remote user.
Option 6
Keypad User can Operate Output - If a DTMF Output control code is programmed into the panel
(P175E12E), the same code can be entered at the panel keypad to allow local control of the Outputs
selected at this address.
Option 7
<Control> button can Operate Output - The <Control> button on the keypad can also be used to turn
outputs on or off. For that to happen this option must be turned on for the output/s concerned. To turn
an output on locally at the keypad the operator simply presses the <Control> button for 2 seconds at
which time the “Control” LED will illuminate on an LED keypad or the word “OUTPUTS” will appear on
the LCD keypad to indicate that the Control mode is active. If any controllable outputs are currently on
they will be indicated at the keypad. The operator can now press a button relating to the output/s they
wish to control eg pressing the “1” button will turn output 1 on or off, The “2” button for output 2 etc.
When finished the operator then presses the <ENTER> button to cancel the Control mode and return to
normal.
49
Option 8
Pulsed Chime Mode Alarm - Chime Zones programmed to this output will turn the output on for the
duration of the Chime to Output time period (P41E). If this option is on the output will pulse at the pulse
timer rate (P39E) for the duration of the chime zone to output timer (P41E).
OUTPUT OPTIONS “B”
OUTPUT OPTIONS “B” - P35E 1-8E
Option 1 - Mains Fail to Output
Option 2 - Fuse Failure to Output
Option 3 - Battery Low to Output
Option 4 - Telephone Line Failure to Output
Option 5 - Supervisory Radio Failure to Output
Option 6 - Sensor-Watch Alarm to Output
Option 7 - System Tamper to Output
Option 8 - Receiver Fail to Output
Option 1
Mains Fail to Output - This option is used to assign a Mains Fail alarm to an Output.
Option 2
Fuse Failure to Output - This option is used to assign a Fuse Failure alarm to an Output. The on-board
fuses are thermally activated. If excessive current is drawn from a fuse it will disconnect the power until
the problem is resolved. There are two thermal fuses protecting the various 12v DC outputs.
Option 3
Battery Low to Output - This option is used to assign a Battery Low alarm to an Output.
Option 4
Telephone Line Failure to Output - This option is used to assign a Telephone Line Failure alarm to an
Output.
Option 5
Supervisory Radio failure to Output - This option is used to assign a Radio Detector Supervisory Fail
alarm to an Output.
Option 6
Sensor-Watch Alarm to Output - This option is used to assign a Sensor-Watch alarm to an Output. A
Sensor-Watch alarm occurs when a detector has not operated within a set period of time.
Option 7
System Tamper to Output - This option is used to assign a panel tamper alarm to an Output.
Option 8
Receiver Fail to Output - If the receiver fail timer expires (see P25E7E) this option will assign the alarm to
an Output.
OUTPUT OPTIONS “C”
OUTPUT OPTIONS “C” - P36E 1-8E
Option 1 - Walk-test Pulse to Output
Option 2 - Pulse Output every 5 seconds when Disarmed
Option 3 - Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following Arming
Option 4 - Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm
Option 1
Walk-test Pulse to Output - When the panel is in Walk-test Mode, this option assigns a pulse to the
Output every time a zone is triggered. The pulse is linked to the Output Pulse time (P39E).
Option 2
Pulse Output every 5 seconds when Disarmed - This option will cause the Output to pulse every 5
seconds when the panel is disarmed. The pulse time is linked to the Output Pulse time (P39E).
Option 3
Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following Arming - This option will cause the Output to pulse for 2 seconds
when the panel is armed and the message has been kissed off by the monitoring company. The pulse
time is linked to the Output Pulse time (P39E) which is defaulted to 2 seconds.
Option 4
Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm - This option will cause the Output to pulse for 2
seconds when a zone has gone into alarm and has been kissed off by the monitoring company. The zone
must have with option 7 turned ON at P124E. The pulse time is linked to the Output Pulse time (P39E)
which is defaulted to 2 seconds.
OUTPUT OPTIONS “D”
OUTPUT OPTIONS “D” - P37E 1-8E
Option 1 - Siren Driver to Output (applies to O/P 1&2 only, requires an 8Ώ speaker)
50
Option 2 - Output Reset/Chime Timers are in Minutes
Option 3 - Output “Silenced” for 10 seconds on key-press
Option 4 - Turn Output OFF during Two Way Voice Mode
Option 5 - Spare
Option 6 - Spare
Option 7 - Spare
Option 8 - Output Monitored (applies to O/P 1&2 only)
Option 1
Siren Driver to Output - This option is used to assign a Modulated Siren tone to an Output. The option only
applies to Outputs 1 and 2. For the modulated siren tone to work correctly, an 8Ώ speaker must be
connected to the output concerned. Outputs 1 and 2 have different sounds so that a user can tell which
output is operating. If this option is turned on for Outputs 1 and/or 2 it will also inhibit the Output during
two way voice mode (see option 4 below).
Option 2
Output Reset/Chime Timers are in Minutes - The default setting for the Output reset time (P40E) is in
seconds and the Output Chime time (P41E) is in 1/10th seconds. If longer times are required, this option
turns both the reset and chime times into minutes (eg 1-9999 minutes for the reset time and 1-255 minutes
for the chime time).
Option 3
Output “Silenced” for 10 seconds on key-press - When the alarm is Armed and activated it can be difficult
sometimes to turn the alarm off because you are unable to hear the beeps as you enter you code at the
keypad. If this option is turned on the selected output/s will silence (turn off) for 10 seconds on the first
button press at any keypad. This should allow easy Disarming of the alarm by a valid User. If the alarm is not
turned off within the 10 seconds, the outputs will turn on again. This function will only work once during an
Armed cycle and the panel must be Disarmed before it will work again.
Option 4
Turn Output OFF during Two Way Voice Mode - If the panel has a full duplex two way voice board fitted
and the settings at P175E2E option 8 and P183E option 5 are set to allow full duplex mode, any outputs with
this option turned on will be disabled while two way voice is operational. This is to ensure that local sirens
do not interfere with the two way voice audio signal.
Option 8
Output Monitored - This option is used to allow Monitoring of the Output status (eg wire to siren has been
cut). The option only applies to Outputs 1 and 2.
OUTPUT ON DELAY TIME
OUTPUT ON DELAY TIME - P38E 1-8E (0-9999 Seconds, 0 = no delay)
The “On” delay allows the operation of the Output to be delayed by the time programmed at this location. If set to “0”
there will be no on delay and the Output will operate the instant it is turned on.
OUTPUT PULSE TIME
OUTPUT PULSE TIME - P39E 1-8E (0-255 1/10th Seconds, eg 20 = 2 secs)
The Pulse time affects the time the output turns on when the pulse timer is used on the Output. The pulse time is in
1/10th second increments so that very quick timing can be achieved. Functions like radio key Arm/Disarm Chirps to an
Output or a flashing output (P34E option 2) all use the pulse timer. If access tags are assigned with the chirp function
(P46E4E) and the LED on an access reader is set to follow an output with the chirps assigned (P98E) then this timer must
be set to a minimum value of 10 for the reader LED to display the chirps.
OUTPUT RESET TIME
OUTPUT RESET TIME - P40E 1-8E (0-9999 Seconds, 0 = latched output)
The Reset time affects the time the output turns on when an alarm is active. The default range is 0-9999 seconds but if
option 2 at location P37E is on the range is 0-9999 minutes.
CHIME MODE TIME
CHIME MODE TIME - P41E 1-8E (0-255 1/10th Seconds, eg 20 = 2 secs)
The Chime Mode time affects the time the output turns on when a Chime Zone is activated. The Chime time is in 1/10th
second increments so that very quick timing can be achieved.
51
START OF “DTMF OUTPUT CONTROL” STATUS
MESSAGES
START OF “DTMF OUTPUT CONTROL” STATUS MESSAGES - P42E 1-8E (0-99)
If a Voice Board is connected to the panel it is possible to dial the panel from a remote telephone and turn outputs On
or Off using a 4 digit code with voice prompts provided by the Voice Board to identify what function you are
controlling. The message programmed at this slot will be the output “ON” message and the output “OFF message
must always follow sequentially (eg if output 1 on message was at slot 5 then output 1 off message must be recorded
at slot 6). Please see Voice Board programming on Page 8 for more details.
UN-MAP OUTPUTS
UN-MAP OUTPUTS - P43E 1-8E
If you are using an Output for a special purpose and do not need the standard defaults assigned to that output you
can remove all defaults at this location. For example if you are using output number 4 to open a door via a Radio Key
and you don’t want any alarms to be assigned to the output press P43E4E and ALL defaults will be removed. This
removes all options assigned to the output and makes the reset time “0” for latched operation.
ASSIGNING A TIME-ZONE to an OUTPUT
ASSIGN A TIME-ZONE TO OUTPUTS - P44E 1-8E (O/P#) Value = Time-zone 1-8
Any of the 8 Time-zones can be assigned to outputs 1-8. If a time-zone is assigned to an output it will turn the output
on when the T/Z starts and turn the output off when the T/Z ends. You should un-map the output at P43E first before
assigning the T/Z to ensure that only the T/Z will control the state of the output.
AREAS
AREA OPTIONS “A”
AREA OPTIONS “A” - P45E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - <ARM> button Required Before Code to Arm
Option 2 - <STAY> button Required Before code to Arm Stay Mode
Option 3 - <CODE> Required to Arm
Option 4 - <CODE> Required to Bypass
Option 5 - Spare
Option 6 - Report Arm Signal at the end of the Exit Delay
Option 7 - Can Arm only if All Zones Sealed (Ready)
Option 8 - Can Arm Stay Mode only if All Zones Sealed (Ready)
Option 1
<ARM> button Required Before Code to Arm - This option determines if the <ARM> button must be
pressed before a code is entered to Arm an Area. If a User has access to both Areas and this option is
turned on, the special keypad arming functions described on Page 32 will apply. This option does not
apply to Prox/PIN readers or Stay mode keypads.
Option 2
<STAY> button Required Before Code to Arm Stay Mode - This option determines if the <STAY>
button must be pressed before a code is entered to Arm Stay Mode. If a User has access to both Areas
and this option is turned on, the special keypad arming functions described on Page 32 will apply. This
option does not apply to Prox/PIN readers or Stay mode keypads.
Option 3
<CODE> Required to Arm - If this option is turned on, the <ARM> button is disabled and the panel
requires a code to Arm.
Option 4
<CODE> Required to Bypass - If this option is turned on, the <BYPASS> button cannot access Bypass
Mode directly. To enter Bypass mode the User must press <BYPASS> <CODE> <ENTER> before they can
bypass zones.
Option 5
Spare
52
Option 6
Report Arm Signal at the end of the Exit Delay - If this option is on the panel will report the Arm signal
to a monitoring station when the exit delay expires. If it is off, the panel will report the arm signal
immediately the system has been armed.
Option 7
Can Arm only if All Zones Sealed (Ready) - If this option is on it stops the panel from arming an area
with an unsealed zone (Not Ready). If off, the panel can be armed if the Ready LED is not on.
Option 8
Can Arm Stay Mode only if All Zones Sealed (Ready) - If this option is on it stops the panel from arming
stay mode if an area has an unsealed zone (Not Ready). If off, the panel can be arm stay mode if the
Ready LED is not on.
AREA OPTIONS “B”
AREA OPTIONS “B” - P46E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Use Near and Verified Alarm reporting for All zones in this Area (CID ONLY)
Option 2 - Area will Arm at the end of Time-Zone
Option 3 - Area will Disarm at the start of Time-Zone
Option 4 - Assign Chirps to Access tags
Option 5 - Spare
Option 6 - Spare
Option 7 - Cannot Arm if Zone Unsealed at end of Exit Delay
Option 8 - Spare
Option 1
Use Near and Verified Alarm reporting for All zones in this Area - To reduce the possibility of false
alarms the panel can require two alarms on different zones within a 45 minute period before a full alarm
will be sent. If this option is turned on it applies to all zones assigned to that area. An alarm on a single
zone will send a CID (Contact ID) Near Alarm report to the monitoring station. If no further alarms occur
within 45 minutes (and the zone that activated is sealed) the near alarm timer is reset and a restore is
sent for the zone that activated. If the zone that activated is still unsealed when the 45 minute timer
expires, a zone bypass for that zone will be sent and the zone will remain bypassed until the area is
disarmed. Any new alarms after the timer has expired will send another Near Alarm report. If a second
alarm on a different zone occurs within 45 minutes of the Near alarm, an Intrusion Verified alarm report
will be sent. This format only applies to Contact ID and Pager reporting. Turning this option on will stop
zone alarms from being reported in Domestic & Voice formats as there are no messages for near and
confirmed alarms. You must turn this option off if using Domestic or Voice formats.
Option 2
Area will Arm at the end of Time-Zone - The panel is capable of automatically arming on a Time-Zone. If
this option is turned on and a Time-Zone is selected at P68E, the Area will automatically arm when the
Time-Zone ends. If the panel cannot arm because it is not “Ready”, a fail to arm report will be sent.
Area will Disarm at the start of Time-Zone - The panel is capable of automatically disarming on a TimeZone. If this option is turned on and a Time-Zone is selected at P68E, the Area will automatically disarm
when the Time-Zone starts.
Option 3
Option 4
Assign Chirps to Access Tags - If the panel is being Armed or Disarmed by an Access Tag/Card from a
proximity reader it is possible to link the pendant chirps programming (P50E-P53E) to Arming or
Disarming via the Access Tag or Card. If this option is On the chirps will apply to Access Tag/Cards. If the
chirps are required to be displayed at the reader LED, the minimum pulse timer for the output (P39E)
must be a value of 10.
Option 7
Cannot Arm if Zone Unsealed at end of Exit Delay - If this option is turned on and a zone becomes
unsealed as the exit delay expires the panel will fail to arm and report this via the dialler. The unsealed
zone must be corrected and the system re-armed again.
AREA ARM INDICATION to OUTPUT
AREA ARM INDICATION to OUTPUT - P47E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
For monitoring purposes an Arm indication can be assigned to an Output. Each Area can have a separate arm
indication assigned to a different output if required.
53
AREA STAY ARM INDICATION to OUTPUT
AREA STAY ARM INDICATION to OUTPUT - P48E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
For monitoring purposes a Stay Arm indication can be assigned to an Output. Each Area can have a separate
indication assigned to a different output if required.
AREA DISARM INDICATION to OUTPUT
AREA DISARM INDICATION to OUTPUT - P49E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
For monitoring purposes a Disarm indication can be assigned to an Output. Each Area can have a separate disarm
indication assigned to a different output if required.
PENDANT ARM CHIRP to OUTPUT
PENDANT ARM CHIRP to OUTPUT - P50E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
When Arming the alarm using a Radio Key it is necessary to have some form of Arm indication. This can done by
pulsing an Output once when the area is armed (one chirp). The Chirp is linked to the pulse time (P39E) for the
output concerned. If Output 1 or 2 are used for the chirp and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or
2E option 1), the siren on the output will give a single tone for the chirp instead of the swept tone used for alarms.
Also Arming via an Access Tag/Card can generate the Chirp if option 4 is On at P47E.
PENDANT STAY MODE ARM CHIRP to OUTPUT
PENDANT STAY MODE ARM CHIRP to OUTPUT - P51E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
When Arming Stay Mode using a Radio Key it is necessary to have some form of Arm indication. This can done by
pulsing an Output once when the area is armed (one chirp). The Chirp is linked to the pulse time (P39E) for the
output concerned. If Output 1 or 2 are used for the chirp and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or
2E option 1), the siren on the output will give a single tone for the chirp instead of the swept tone used for alarms.
Also Stay Arming via an Access Tag/Card can generate the Chirp if option 4 is On at P47E.
PENDANT DISARM CHIRP to OUTPUT
PENDANT DISARM CHIRP to OUTPUT - P52E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
When Disarming the alarm using a Radio Key it is necessary to have some form of Disarm indication. This can done by
pulsing an Output twice when the area is disarmed (two chirps). The Chirps are linked to the pulse time (P39E) for the
output concerned. If Output 1 or 2 are used for the chirp and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or
2E option 1), the siren on the output will give a single tone for the chirp instead of the swept tone used for alarms.
Also Disarming via an Access Tag/Card can generate the Chirp if option 4 is On at P47E.
54
PENDANT STAY MODE DISARM CHIRP to OUTPUT
PENDANT STAY MODE DISARM CHIRP to OUTPUT - P53E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
When Disarming Stay Mode using a Radio Key it is necessary to have some form of Disarm indication. This can done by
pulsing an Output twice when the Stay Mode is disarmed (two chirps). The Chirps are linked to the pulse time (P39E) for
the output concerned. If Output 1 or 2 are used for the chirp and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or
2E option 1), the siren on the output will give a single tone for the chirp instead of the swept tone used for alarms. Also
Stay Mode Disarming via an Access Tag/Card can generate the Chirp if option 4 is On at P47E.
ARM PULSE to OUTPUT
ARM PULSE to OUTPUT - P54E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
Sometimes it is necessary to have a single pulse to indicate an Arm state. This could be used to start a video recorder or
similar device. Each time an Area is armed, a single pulse will be applied to the output. The Pulse time (P39E) sets the
length of the pulse .
STAY MODE ARM PULSE to OUTPUT
STAY MODE ARM PULSE to OUTPUT - P55E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
Sometimes it is necessary to have a single pulse to indicate that Stay Mode is Armed. This could be used to start a video
recorder or similar device. Each time an Area Stay Mode is armed, a single pulse will be applied to the output. The Pulse
time (P39E) sets the length of the pulse .
DISARM PULSE to OUTPUT
DISARM PULSE to OUTPUT - P56E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 8 - Output 8
Sometimes it is necessary to have a single pulse to indicate a Disarm state. This could be used to stop a video recorder or
similar device. Each time an Area is disarmed, a single pulse will be applied to the output. The Pulse time (P39E) sets the
length of the pulse.
STAY MODE DISARM PULSE to OUTPUT
STAY MODE DISARM PULSE to OUTPUT - P57E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
Sometimes it is necessary to have a single pulse to indicate a Disarm of Stay Mode. This could be used to stop a video
recorder or similar device. Each time an Area Stay Mode is disarmed, a single pulse will be applied to the output. The
Pulse time (P39E) sets the length of the pulse.
55
ARMED EXIT DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD
ARMED EXIT DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P58E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
When an Area is Armed it is useful to have the exit delay beeps occurring at the keypad to warn the User to exit the
premises without delay. If the option is on at this address, that keypad will beep out the exit delay. The exit beeps occur
at one second intervals until the last 5 seconds at which time they change to 1/2 second intervals to act as a warning that
the delay is about to expire.
STAY MODE EXIT DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD
STAY MODE EXIT DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P59E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
When an Area is Armed in Stay Mode it is useful to have the exit delay beeps occurring at the keypad to warn the User to
exit the premises without delay. If the option is on at this address, that keypad will beep out the exit delay. This option
may be turned off for Stay Mode to make the keypad silent when arming at night time. The exit beeps occur at one
second intervals until the last 5 seconds at which time they change to 1/2 second intervals to act as a warning that the
delay is about to expire. When arming Stay Mode the exit and entry delays can be cancelled by pressing the <ENTER>
button following arming of Stay Mode. The next time Stay Mode is armed, if the <ENTER> button is not pressed, all
programmed exit and entry delays will apply.
ARMED EXIT DELAY TIME
ARMED EXIT DELAY TIME - P60E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 0-255 Seconds)
Each Area can have their own exit delay time. The delay can be programmed from 1-255 seconds in one second
increments. If the exit delay is set to “0” the panel will be instantly armed.
STAY MODE EXIT DELAY TIME
STAY MODE EXIT DELAY TIME - P61E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 0-255 Seconds)
Each Stay Mode Area can have their own exit delay time. The delay can be programmed from 1-255 seconds in one
second increments. If the exit delay is set to “0” the panel will be instantly armed.
MONITORING ACCOUNT CODE NUMBER
MONITORING ACCOUNT CODE NUMBER - P62E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 0000-FFFF)
When the dialler is reporting to a monitoring station there must be a unique account code programmed to identify the
panel. There is an account code for each area. The account code is 4 digits. Each digit can be a number from 0-9 as well as
the special characters B,C,D,E & F. The chart below shows how the special characters are entered.
DTMF REMOTE CONTROL CODE NUMBER
DTMF REMOTE CODE NUMBER - P63E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)
The panel can be configured to allow remote Arm/Disarm of each Area via a remote telephone. The codes programmed
at this address are the DTMF code that must be used when performing this function. When dialling the panel and it has
answered the call, after waiting for the panel modem tones to stop you can enter in the 4 digit DTMF code and the
current status will be given of the Area associated with the code entered. After that, if you press the “*” button on the
telephone the status of the area will toggle eg if is was previously armed it will change to disarmed or vice versa. When
finished you simply hang-up and 15 seconds later the panel will release the line.
56
START OF “DTMF ARM/DISARM” STATUS
MESSAGES
START OF “DTMF ARM/DISARM” STATUS MESSAGES - P64E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (0-99)
If a Voice Board is connected to the panel it is possible to dial the panel from a remote telephone and Arm or Disarm
each Area using a 4 digit code with voice prompts provided by the Voice Board to identify what Area you are controlling.
The message programmed at this slot will be the “ARMED” message and the “DISARMED message must always follow
sequentially (eg if area A armed message was at slot 3 the area A disarmed message must be recorded at slot 4). Please
see Voice Board programming on Page 8 for more details.
ARMED EXIT BEEPS to OUTPUT
LED KEYPAD
BUTTON
LED KEYPAD
INDICATION
LCD KEYPAD
BUTTON
LCD KEYPAD
CID & 4+2
INDICATIONS
LCD KEYPAD
TELEPHONE INDICATIONS
“BYPASS”
-
CONTROL & 0
-
“PANIC”
11
CONTROL & 2
“MEMORY”
12
“CONTROL”
CID & 4+2
SPECIAL
CHARACTERS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
SPECIAL FUNCTION
DELETE #
DELETE #
DELETE #
B
#
“B”
“#”
CONTROL & 3
C
*
“C”
“*”
13
CONTROL & 4
D
-
“D”
“2.5 sec Pause”
“ARM”
14
CONTROL & 5
E
w
“E”
“Wait for 2nd Dial-tone”
“STAY”
15
CONTROL & 6
F
=
“F”
“5 sec Pause”
ARMED EXIT BEEPS to OUTPUT - P65E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
Sometimes it can be useful to extend the exit beeps, that occur at a keypad, to be present on an audible device on the
exit path. This option allows the exit beeps during arming to be assigned to any of the 8 outputs. The Pulse time (P39E)
sets the length of each beep.
STAY MODE ARM EXIT BEEPS to OUTPUT
STAY MODE ARM EXIT BEEPS to OUTPUT - P66E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 8 - Output 8
Sometimes it can be useful to extend the exit beeps, that occur at a keypad, to be present on an audible device on the
exit path. This option allows the exit beeps during the arming of stay mode to be assigned to any of the 8 outputs. The
Pulse time (P39E) sets the length of each beep.
AREA DELINQUENCY DELAY
AREA DELINQUENCY DELAY - P67E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 0-99 Days)
Each Area can have their own Delinquency time. The delinquency time monitors the arm/disarms of each Area. If an Area
has not been armed within the set number of days a delinquency report will be sent. Each time an Area is armed the
delinquency timer is reset. A value of “0” disables the delinquency monitoring.
NOTE: If the default value of “0” is changed at this location (eg a value of 10 is entered meaning 10 days), the next time
the area is armed a delinquency restore message will be sent via the dialler (Event type 454) as a test that the function is
operating.
57
AUTOMATIC ARM/DISARM TIMEZONE
AUTOMATIC ARM/DISARM TIMEZONE - P68E 1-2E (1 = Area A, 2 = Area B) (Value 1-8)
Option 1 - Time-Zone 1
Option 2 - Time-Zone 2
Option 3 - Time-Zone 3
Option 4 - Time-Zone 4
Option 5 - Time-Zone 5
Option 6 - Time-Zone 6
Option 7 - Time-Zone 7
Option 8 - Time-Zone 8
If Option 2 or 3 are turned on location P46E then the Area can be automatically armed or disarmed by a time-zone/s. You
can assign more than one time-zone to each Area. If assigning multiple time-zones you should insure that they do not
overlap as this could cause confusion. A Time-zone would typically be 0830-1700 Monday-Friday. An area will turn on
when the Time-zone ends (eg 1700) and turn off when a Time-zone starts (eg 0830)
KEYPADS
KEYPAD AREA ASSIGNMENT
KEYPAD AREA ASSIGNMENT - P71E 1-8E
Option 1 - Area “A”
Option 2 - Area “B”
Option 1
Area “A” - This option assigns Area A to keypads. If a keypad is assigned to only Area A it can only Arm or
Disarm that area.
Option 2
Area “B” - This option assigns Area B to keypads. If a keypad is assigned to only Area B it can only Arm or
Disarm that area.
KEYPAD BUTTON OPTIONS
KEYPAD BUTTON OPTIONS - P72E 1-8E
Option 1 - <CHIME> or <CONTROL><PROGRAM> button Enabled
Option 2 - <BYPASS> button Enabled
Option 3 - <PANIC> button Enabled
Option 4 - Delayed Operation of <PANIC> button
Option 5 - <1> + <3> or <CONTROL> + <CHIME> Panic Alarm Enabled
Option 6 - <4> + <6> or <A> + <B> Fire Alarm Enabled
Option 7 - <7> + <9> or <B> + <CHIME> Medical Alarm Enabled
Option 8 - Stay Armed Beep to Keypad
Option 1
<CHIME> or <CONTROL><PROGRAM> button Enabled - This option enables the <CHIME> button on the
Landscape LCD keypads or the <CONTROL> followed by the <PROGRAM> button on the LED and Portrait
LCD keypads. Chime alarms to the keypad buzzer and outputs are disabled when “Chime” is off. If a zone is
programmed as a Chime Zone, it can beep the buzzer on a keypad and/or turn on an output as well to give a
local “CHIME” indication. A typical use of “Chime” Mode is as a door minder in a shop. Sometimes it may be
desirable to disable Chime mode without the need to reprogram the panel. This can be achieved by
allowing Chime Mode to be disabled with the <CHIME> button on a Landscape LCD keypad, or by using the
<CONTROL> and <PROGRAM> buttons on an LED or Portrait LCD keypad. If you press the <CHIME> button
on a Landscape LCD keypad for 2 seconds (and this option is turned on for that keypad) the display will
show “Chime Mode OFF”. This means that the buzzer will now not sound at the keypad concerned and any
Chime Mode Outputs will not activate. Pressing the <CHIME> button again for 2 seconds will toggle chime
mode back to on again. If using an LED or Portrait LCD keypad (which do not have a dedicated chime
button), you simply press and hold the <CONTROL> Button and within 2 seconds then press the
<PROGRAM> button to toggle chime mode. The Portrait LCD keypad will show “Chime Mode OFF’ and the
LED keypad will turn on the “AUX(0)” Led to show that chime mode is off. Performing the process again will
toggle chime mode back to the on state again.
Option 2
<BYPASS> button Enabled - This option enables the <BYPASS> button (by keypad number) on any
keypads connected to the panel .
58
Option 3
<PANIC> button Enabled - This option enables the <PANIC> button (by keypad number) on the LED or
Portrait LCD keypads connected to the panel .
Option 4
Delayed Operation of <PANIC> button - This option assigns a 2 second delay before the <PANIC> button
will cause an alarm. The button must be held down for longer than 2 seconds to create a panic alarm.
Option 5
<1> + <3> or CCONTROL> + <CHIME> Panic Alarm Enabled - This option enables a Panic Alarm to be
created when buttons <1> + <3> are pressed simultaneously on the LED or Portrait LCD keypads. It also
enables the <CHIME> + <CONTROL> Panic Alarm when both buttons are pressing simultaneously on a
Portrait LCD keypad.
Option 6
<4> + <6> or <A> + <B> Fire Alarm Enabled - This option enables a Fire Alarm to be created when
buttons <4> + <6> are pressed simultaneously on the LED or Portrait LCD keypads. It also enables the <A>
+ <B> Fire Alarm when both buttons are pressing simultaneously on a Landscape LCD keypad.
Option 7
<7> + <9> or <B> + <CHIME> Medical Alarm Enabled - This option enables a Medical Alarm to be
created when buttons <7> + <9> are pressed simultaneously on the LED or Portrait LCD keypads. It also
enables the <B> + <CHIME> Medical Alarm when both buttons are pressing simultaneously on a
Landscape LCD keypad.
Option 8
Stay Armed Beep to Keypad - If this option is turned on the keypad will give three short beeps when Stay
Mode is armed. It is designed to be used when stay mode exit delay beeps (P59E) are turned off to provide
an audible indication that Stay mode is now armed from the selected keypad.
KEYPAD SYSTEM BEEPS & LED OPTIONS
KEYPAD SYSTEM BEEPS & LED OPTIONS - P73E 1-8E
Option 1 - Mains Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer
Option 2 - Fuse Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer
Option 3 - Battery Low Beeps Keypad Buzzer
Option 4 - Telephone Line Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer
Option 5 - System Tamper Beeps Keypad Buzzer
Option 6 - Receiver Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer
Option 7 - Turn Off Keypad LED’s when Armed
Option 8 - Turn Off Keypad LCD & Keypad Backlighting on Mains Fail
Option 1
Option 2
Mains Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Mains Failure will cause the keypad buzzer to sound
continuously. The continuous beep will automatically clear when the Mains returns to normal or it can be
silenced by pressing the <ENTER> button on the keypad.
Fuse Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Fuse Failure (12v DC output short) will cause the
keypad buzzer to sound continuously. The continuous beep will automatically clear when the short is
removed and the fuse returns to normal or it can be silenced by pressing the <ENTER> button on the
keypad.
Option 3
Battery Low Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Panel Battery Low will cause the keypad buzzer to
sound continuously. The continuous beep will automatically clear when the battery returns to normal or it
can be silenced by pressing the <ENTER> button on the keypad.
Option 4
Telephone Line Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Telephone Line Failure will cause the
keypad buzzer to sound continuously. The continuous beep will automatically clear when the Telephone
Line returns to normal or it can be silenced by pressing the <ENTER> button on the keypad.
Option 5
System Tamper Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Panel Tamper Alarm will cause the keypad
buzzer to sound continuously. The Alarm must then be cleared by entering in a valid code at the keypad.
Option 6
Receiver Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer - If this option is on a Receiver Failure will cause the keypad buzzer to
sound continuously. The continuous beep will automatically clear when the Receiver starts to see
transmissions again or it can be silenced by pressing the <ENTER> button on the keypad.
Option 7
Turn Off Keypad LED’s when Armed - This option allows the LED’s on a keypad to be turned off when the
panel is in the Armed state. It is normally used to cut the illumination from a keypad at night time. The LED’s
will return to the normal state on disarming of the alarm. The LED’s will turn off within 90 seconds of arming
the system.
59
Option 8
Turn Off Keypad LCD & Keypad Backlighting on Mains Fail - This option allows the backlighting on an LCD
on a keypad (both the keypad buttons and the LCD module backlighting) to be turned off when there is a
Mains Failure. It is normally used to cut the power consumed by the keypad during a power failure. The LCD
backlighting will turn off within 90 seconds of the mains failing. If a button is pressed at the keypad the
backlighting will turn back on again. Following 90 seconds of no keypad activity the backlighting will turn
off. The LCD backlighting will return to the normal state when Mains is restored.
KEYPAD <ARM> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT
KEYPAD <ARM> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT - P74E 1-8E
Option 1 - Area “A”
Option 2 - Area “B”
Option 1
Area “A” - This option assigns the keypad <ARM> button to Area A. If a keypad <ARM> button is assigned
to only Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.
Option 2
Area “B” - This option assigns the keypad <ARM> button to Area B. If a keypad <ARM> button is assigned
to only Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.
KEYPAD <ARM> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS
KEYPAD <ARM> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS - P75E 1-8E
Option 1 - <ARM> button can Arm
Option 2 - <ARM> button can Arm Stay Mode
Option 3 - <ARM> button can Disarm at All Times
Option 4 - <ARM> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times
Option 5 - <ARM> button can Reset Alarms
Option 6 - <ARM> button can Arm Latchkey Mode
Option 7 - <ARM> button can Disarm During Exit Delay
Option 8 - <ARM> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay
Option 1
<ARM> button can Arm - This option enables single button Arming using the <ARM> button. For single
button operation to work options 1 & 3 must be off at location P46E.
Option 2
<ARM> button can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables single button Arming of Stay Mode using the
<ARM> button. For single button operation to work options 1 & 3 must be off at location P46E.
(NOTE: Following arming of Stay Mode, if the <ENTER> button is pressed, all entry & exit delays will be
reset to zero for that armed period).
<ARM> button can Disarm at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming using the <ARM>
button. For single button disarm operation to work options 1 & 3 must be off at location P46E
Option 3
Option 4
<ARM> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming of Stay
Mode using the <ARM> button. For single button disarm operation to work options 1 & 3 must be off at
location P46E
Option 5
<ARM> button can Reset Alarms - If this option is On, Pressing the <ARM> button (provided Option 3 is
also On) will reset an alarm condition without having to enter a user code.
Option 6
<ARM> button can Arm Latchkey Mode - This option enables single button Arming of the alarm in
Latchkey report mode using the <ARM> button. For single button disarm operation to work options 1 & 3
must be off at location P45E. When Latchkey Mode is set on Arming, any code without the Latchkey option
(P4E Option 6) used to Disarm the Alarm will cause a Disarm report to be sent via the dialler.
Option 7
<ARM> button can Disarm During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming using the
<ARM> button provided the Armed Mode exit delay is active. If the exit delay has expired the <ARM>
button cannot be used to disarm the alarm. For single button disarm operation to work options 1 & 3 must
be off at location P46E
Option 8
<ARM> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming of
Stay Mode using the <ARM> button provided the Stay Mode exit delay is active. If the Stay Mode exit delay
has expired the <ARM> button cannot be used to disarm Stay Mode. For single button disarm operation to
work options 1 & 3 must be off at location P46E
60
KEYPAD <STAY> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT
KEYPAD <STAY> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT - P76E 1-8E
Option 1 - Area “A”
Option 2 - Area “B”
Option 1
Area “A” - This option assigns the keypad <STAY> button to Area A. If a keypad <STAY> button is assigned
to only Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.
Option 1
Area “B” - This option assigns the keypad <STAY> button to Area B. If a keypad <STAY> button is assigned
to only Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.
KEYPAD <STAY> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS
KEYPAD <STAY> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS - P77E 1-8E
Option 1 - <STAY> button can Arm
Option 2 - <STAY> button can Arm Stay Mode
Option 3 - <STAY> button can Disarm at All Times
Option 4 - <STAY> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times
Option 5 - <STAY> button can Reset Alarms
Option 6 - <STAY> button can Arm Latchkey Mode
Option 7 - <STAY> button can Disarm During Exit Delay
Option 8 - <STAY> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay
Option 1
<STAY> button can Arm - This option enables single button Arming using the <STAY> button. For single
button operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E.
Option 2
<STAY> button can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables single button Arming of Stay Mode using the
<STAY> button. For single button operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E.
(NOTE: Following arming of Stay Mode, if the <ENTER> button is pressed, all entry & exit delays will be
reset to zero for that armed period).
Option 3
<STAY> button can Disarm at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming using the <STAY>
button. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E
Option 4
<STAY> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming of Stay
Mode using the <STAY> button. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at
location P46E
Option 5
<STAY> button can Reset Alarms - If this option is On, Pressing the <STAY> button (provided Option 4 is
also On) will reset an alarm condition without having to enter a user code.
Option 6
<STAY> button can Arm Latchkey Mode - This option enables single button Arming of the alarm in
Latchkey report mode using the <STAY> button. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3
must be off at location P45E. When Latchkey Mode is set on Arming, any code without the Latchkey option
(P4E Option 6) used to Disarm the Alarm will cause a Disarm report to be sent via the dialler.
Option 7
<STAY> button can Disarm During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming using the
<STAY> button provided the Armed Mode exit delay is active. If the exit delay has expired the <STAY>
button cannot be used to disarm the alarm. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must
be off at location P46E
Option 8
<STAY> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming of
Stay Mode using the <STAY> button provided the Stay Mode exit delay is active. If the Stay Mode exit delay
has expired the <STAY> button cannot be used to disarm Stay Mode. For single button disarm operation to
work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E
KEYPAD <A> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT
KEYPAD <A> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT - P78E 1-8E (APPLIES TO PORTRAIT LCD KEYPAD ONLY)
Option 1 - Area “A”
Option 2 - Area “B”
61
Option 1
Area “A” - This option assigns the keypad <A> button to Area A. If a keypad <A> button is assigned to only
Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.
Option 1
Area “B” - This option assigns the keypad <A> button to Area B. If a keypad <A> button is assigned to only
Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.
KEYPAD <A> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS
KEYPAD <A> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS - P79E 1-8E (APPLIES TO PORTRAIT LCD KEYPAD ONLY)
Option 1 - <A> button can Arm
Option 2 - <A> button can Arm Stay Mode
Option 3 - <A> button can Disarm at All Times
Option 4 - <A> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times
Option 5 - <A> button can Reset Alarms
Option 6 - <A> button can Arm Latchkey Mode
Option 7 - <A> button can Disarm During Exit Delay
Option 8 - <A> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay
Option 1
<A> button can Arm - This option enables single button Arming using the <A> button. For single button
operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E.
Option 2
<A> button can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables single button Arming of Stay Mode using the <A>
button. For single button operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E.
(NOTE: Following arming of Stay Mode, if the <ENTER> button is pressed, all entry & exit delays will be
reset to zero for that armed period).
Option 3
<A> button can Disarm at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming using the <A> button.
For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E
Option 4
<A> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming of Stay Mode
using the <A> button. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location
P46E
Option 5
<A> button can Reset Alarms - If this option is On, Pressing the <A> button (provided Option 3 is also On)
will reset an alarm condition without having to enter a user code.
Option 6
<A> button can Arm Latchkey Mode - This option enables single button Arming of the alarm in Latchkey
report mode using the <A> button. For single button Arm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at
location P45E. When Latchkey Mode is set on Arming, any code without the Latchkey option (P4E Option 6)
used to Disarm the Alarm will cause a Disarm report to be sent via the dialler.
Option 7
<A> button can Disarm During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming using the <A>
button provided the Armed Mode exit delay is active. If the exit delay has expired the <A> button cannot be
used to disarm the alarm. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location
P46E
Option 8
<A> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming of Stay
Mode using the <A> button provided the Stay Mode exit delay is active. If the Stay Mode exit delay has
expired the <A> button cannot be used to disarm Stay Mode. For single button disarm operation to work
options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E
KEYPAD <B> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT
KEYPAD <B> BUTTON AREA ASSIGNMENT - P80E 1-8E (APPLIES TO PORTRAIT LCD KEYPAD ONLY)
Option 1 - Area “A”
Option 2 - Area “B”
Option 1
Area “A” - This option assigns the keypad <B> button to Area A. If a keypad <B> button is assigned to only
Area A it can only Arm or Disarm that area.
Option 1
Area “B” - This option assigns the keypad <B> button to Area B. If a keypad <B> button is assigned to only
Area B it can only Arm or Disarm that area.
62
KEYPAD <B> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS
KEYPAD <B> BUTTON AREA OPTIONS - P81E 1-8E (APPLIES TO PORTRAIT LCD KEYPAD ONLY)
Option 1 - <B> button can Arm
Option 2 - <B> button can Arm A Mode
Option 3 - <B> button can Disarm at All Times
Option 4 - <B> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times
Option 5 - <B> button can Reset Alarms
Option 6 - <B> button can Arm Latchkey Mode
Option 7 - <B> button can Disarm During Exit Delay
Option 8 - <B> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay
Option 1
<B> button can Arm - This option enables single button Arming using the <B> button. For single button
operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E.
Option 2
<B> button can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables single button Arming of Stay Mode using the <B>
button. For single button operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E.
(NOTE: Following arming of Stay Mode, if the <ENTER> button is pressed, all entry & exit delays will be
reset to zero for that armed period).
Option 3
<B> button can Disarm at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming using the <B> button.
For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E
Option 4
<B> button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times - This option enables single button Disarming of Stay Mode
using the <B> button. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location
P46E
Option 5
<B> button can Reset Alarms - If this option is On, Pressing the <B> button (provided Option 3 is also On)
will reset an alarm condition without having to enter a user code.
Option 6
<B> button can Arm Latchkey Mode - This option enables single button Arming of the alarm in Latchkey
report mode using the <B> button. For single button Arm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at
location P45E. When Latchkey Mode is set on Arming, any code without the Latchkey option (P4E Option 6)
used to Disarm the Alarm will cause a Disarm report to be sent via the dialler.
Option 7
<B> button can Disarm During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming using the <B>
button provided the Armed Mode exit delay is active. If the exit delay has expired the <B> button cannot be
used to disarm the alarm. For single button disarm operation to work options 2 & 3 must be off at location
P46E
Option 8
<B> button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay - This option allows single button Disarming of Stay
Mode using the <B> button provided the Stay Mode exit delay is active. If the Stay Mode exit delay has
expired the <B> button cannot be used to disarm Stay Mode. For single button disarm operation to work
options 2 & 3 must be off at location P46E
KEYPAD to OUTPUT MASK
KEYPAD to OUTPUT MASK - P82E 1-8E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
A Keypad can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. If a Keypad is not assigned to an Output a User cannot turn
that Output On or Off from the Keypad. This feature is useful when using the access control features of the panel, eg a
User may be allowed to operate more than one Output with their code but they will be limited to just the Output
assigned to the Keypad they are using.
<CONTROL> BUTTON to OUTPUT MASK
<CONTROL> BUTTON to OUTPUT MASK - P83E 1-8E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
63
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
The <CONTROL> button at a Keypad can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. If the <CONTROL> button is not
assigned to an Output a User cannot access Local Control Mode (by pressing the <CONTROL> button) and turn that
Output On or Off from the Keypad. This feature is useful if Outputs are being used to control devices such as lights, etc
and you wish to be able to turn them On or Off from a keypad. By limiting the access to Outputs via the <CONTROL>
button you can avoid conflict with alarm outputs (eg the User can be denied access to outputs that are being used for
alarm functions).
KEYPAD PANIC ALARM to OUTPUT
KEYPAD PANIC ALARM to OUTPUT - P84E 1-8E (includes <PANIC>, <1> & <3> or <CONTROL> & <CHIME>)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
A Keypad generated Panic Alarm (either pressing the <PANIC> button, <1> & <3> or <CONTROL> & <CHIME>
together) can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. This can be used to operate an audible or visual alarm
connected to the Output.
KEYPAD FIRE ALARM to OUTPUT
KEYPAD FIRE ALARM to OUTPUT - P85E 1-8E (includes <A> & <B> or <4> & <6>)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
A Keypad generated Fire Alarm (either pressing the <A> & <B> or <4> & <6> together) can be assigned to an Output or
multiple Outputs. This can be used to operate an audible or visual alarm connected to the Output.
KEYPAD MEDICAL ALARM to OUTPUT
KEYPAD MEDICAL ALARM to OUTPUT - P86E 1-8E (includes <B> & <CHIME> or <7> & <9>)
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
A Keypad generated Medical Alarm (either pressing the <B> & <CHIME> or <7> & <9> together) can be assigned to an
Output or multiple Outputs. This can be used to operate an audible or visual alarm connected to the Output.
KEYPAD DURESS ALARM to OUTPUT
KEYPAD DURESS ALARM to OUTPUT - P87E 1-8E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
A Keypad generated Duress Alarm (see P25E2E) can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. This can be used to
operate an audible or visual alarm connected to the Output. A Duress alarm is created when the alarm is Disarmed with
the Duress digit preceding a valid User Code.
KEYPAD TAMPER SWITCH ALARM to OUTPUT
KEYPAD TAMPER SWITCH ALARM to OUTPUT - P88E 1-8E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
64
If the keypad has a Tamper Switch fitted and this switch is activated, the Tamper Alarm can be assigned to an Output or
multiple Outputs. This can be used to operate an audible or visual alarm connected to the Output.
KEYPAD WRONG CODE ALARM to OUTPUT
KEYPAD WRONG CODE ALARM to OUTPUT - P89E 1-8E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If someone is attempting disarm the alarm by trying various code combinations and they enter in 4 wrong codes the
panel will go into a “Wrong Code” tamper alarm. The Alarm can be assigned to an Output or multiple Outputs. This can
be used to operate an audible or visual alarm connected to the Output. A correct code entry will reset the tamper alarm.
MANUAL PANIC ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
MANUAL PANIC ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P90E 1-8E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
When a keypad generated Panic Alarm is generated, the alarm can be silent or it can operate the buzzer in the keypad.
MANUAL FIRE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
MANUAL FIRE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P91E 1-8E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
When a keypad generated Fire Alarm is generated, the alarm can be silent or it can operate the buzzer in the keypad.
MANUAL MEDICAL ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
MANUAL MEDICAL ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P92E 1-8E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
When a keypad generated Medical Alarm is generated, the alarm can be silent or it can operate the buzzer in the keypad.
WRONG CODE or KEYPAD TAMPER BEEPS TO
KEYPAD
WRONG CODE or KEYPAD TAMPER SWITCH ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P93E 1-8E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If someone enters in an incorrect code more than 4 times or a Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm is generated, the alarm can
be silent or it can operate the buzzer in the keypad. The selected keypad, e.g. P93E1E for keypad number 1 is the one at
which the alarm has occurred and the options 1-8 are the keypads that will beep in alarm.
CHIME ALARM KEYPAD BEEP TIME
CHIME ALARM KEYPAD BEEP TIME - P94E 1-8E (Value = 0-255 1/10th Second)
65
When a Chime Zone is activated it can operate an Output and/or beep the keypad buzzer. There is a separate Chime
timer for each of the 8 keypads. If the value is made “0” for a keypad the Chime Zone will not beep the keypad buzzer. The
Keypad Chime Timer can be set to a value from 1-255. The units are in 1/10th second increments. This means that a value
of 10 will beep the keypad buzzer for 1 second.
PROXIMITY READER LED to OUTPUT MAPPING
PROXIMITY READER LED to OUTPUT MAPPING - P98E 1-8E
Option 1 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 1
Option 2 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 2
Option 3 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 3
Option 4 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 4
Option 5 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 5
Option 6 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 6
Option 7 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 7
Option 8 - Proximity Reader 1-8 LED follows Output 8
If a proximity reader is connected to the control panel it may be desirable to have the LED provide some form of
indication such as Arm/Disarm state, etc. By using this location it is possible to link the LED at a reader number to follow
the programming of an output. The LED can be used to indicate Arm/Disarm state, Stay Mode Arm/disarm, output On/Off,
etc. If chirps have been assigned to access tags/cards (P46E4E) and the output the reader LED is set to follow has the
chirps assigned (P50E-P53E), then the output must have a minimum pulse time (P39E) of 10 for it to work correctly.
The proximity reader keypad address number is set at P99E as detailed below.
LEARN PROXIMITY READER KEYPAD ADDRESS
NUMBER
LEARN PROXIMITY READER KEYPAD ADDRESS NUMBER - P99E 1-8E (Value = Keypad Address 1-8)
When a Proximity reader is connected to the panel it must have a unique keypad address number assigned so that any
program options can be assigned to that specific reader. To program the keypad address you must first connect the
reader to the panel via the keypad buss. Then from installer program mode, enter in P99E followed by the keypad address
you wish to assign to the reader (eg P99E4E will assign keypad address 4). To assign this keypad address to a selected
reader you have to present a tag or card 5 times within 10 seconds to learn the keypad address number. The tag or card
does not have to be enrolled at the panel to set the keypad address. When the address has been learnt by the reader it
sends an acknowledgement back to the panel which will stop the learn mode. To assign a different address to another
reader you must go through the same process again only this time entering in a different keypad address number (eg
P99E5E for keypad address 5). Repeat the process until all readers have been assigned a unique keypad address. Now any
keypad specific options can be assigned to the readers (eg assign areas/outputs or users to the reader).
If you do not assign a unique address to every keypad and reader connected to the keypad buss, a conflict will exist
that will cause erratic operation. Each reader or keypad MUST have a different address.
NOTE: The proximity and arming readers flash out the assigned keypad address number on their LED whenever the panel
is in “Installer Program” Mode. This allows quick identification of the assigned address for each reader.
KEY-SWITCHES
The two Key-Switch inputs are available on the panel tamper. Normally the panel tamper is a single 2k2 EOL resistor,
however if the tamper input is wired as per the type 14 option shown on page 5, the 4k7 resistor becomes Key-switch
number 1 and the 8k2 resistor becomes Key-switch number 2 (the 2k2 still acts as the tamper resistor). If the tamper
input is shorted out or cut the panel will still go into system tamper alarm but provided the 2k2 resistor is maintained
then shorting or opening the 4k7 or 8k2 resistors will operate the key-switch functions.
KEY-SWITCH AREA ASSIGNMENT
KEY-SWITCH AREA ASSIGNMENT - P111E 1-2E (1 = Key-switch # 1, 2 = Key-switch # 2)
Option 1 - Area “A”
Option 2 - Area “B”
Option 1
Area “A” - This option assigns the key-switch to Area A. If a key-switch is assigned to only Area A it can only
Arm or Disarm that area.
Option 2
Area “B” - This option assigns the key-switch to Area B. If a key-switch is assigned to only Area B it can only
Arm or Disarm that area.
66
KEY-SWITCH ACCESS & OPERATIONAL OPTIONS
KEY-SWITCH ACCESS & OPERATIONAL OPTIONS - P112E 1-2E (1 = Key-switch # 1, 2 = Key-switch # 2)
Option 1 - Key-Switch can Arm
Option 2 - Key-Switch can Arm Stay Mode
Option 3 - Key-Switch can Disarm
Option 4 - Key-Switch can Disarm Stay Mode
Option 5 - Key-Switch has Security Guard Options
Option 6 - Key-Switch will Arm Latchkey Mode
Option 7 - Key-Switch is NO (Normally Open)
Option 8 - Key-Switch is Momentary
Option 1
Key-Switch can Arm - This option enables Arming of the assigned Area via the Key-switch.
Option 2
Key-Switch can Arm Stay Mode - This option enables Stay Mode Arming of the assigned Area via the Keyswitch.
Option 3
Key-Switch can Disarm - This option enables Disarming of the assigned Area via the Key-switch.
Option 4
Key-Switch can Disarm Stay Mode - This option enables Stay Mode Disarming of the assigned Area via the
Key-switch.
Option 5
Key-Switch has Security Guard Options - If the key-switch has option 5 on, they can Arm all Areas assigned,
but they may only Disarm if the panel is currently Armed and in the alarm state.
Option 6
Key-Switch will Arm Latchkey Mode - If the panel is armed by a key-switch with this option on, then the
panel will be armed in Latchkey mode. This means that when the alarm is disarmed by a key-switch with this
option off, or a code with option 6 at P4E off, then a disarm report will be sent. The option is designed to
alert the alarm owner when children have returned home and disarmed the alarm.
Option 7
Key-Switch is NO (Normally Open) - The key-switch can be a NO (Normally Open) or a NC (Normally
Closed) key-switch. The normal, or rest state, of the key-switch can be programmed at this location. If the
key-switch contacts usually rest in the open state and close when the key-switch is operated you should
turn on option 7.
Option 8
Key-Switch is Momentary - The operation of the key-switch can be momentary or latching. If option 8 is on,
the key-switch operation is assumed to be momentary. This means that each time the key-switch is
operated then released the area will toggle its current state (ie if armed it will become disarmed or vice
versa). If this option is turned off it is assumed that the key-switch is a latching type. This means that when
the key-switch is operated and the key removed the contacts remain in the same state. When a latching keyswitch is used, turning on the switch will arm the area and turning it off will disarm the area.
ZONES
ZONE AREA ASSIGNMENT
ZONE AREA ASSIGNMENT - P121E 1-16E
Option 1 - Area “A”
Option 2 - Area “B”
Option 1
Area “A” - This option assigns the Zone to Area A. If a Zone is assigned only to Area A it will activate if Area A
is armed. If the zone is in both area A & B then it will activate only when both areas are armed.
Option 2
Area “B” - This option assigns the Zone to Area B. If a Zone is assigned only to Area B it will activate if Area B
is armed. If the zone is in both area A & B then it will activate only when both areas are armed.
ZONE OPTIONS A
ZONE OPTIONS A - P122E 1-16E
Option 1 - Zone is Active
Option 2 - Zone is N/O
67
Option 3 - Spare
Option 4 - Keypad Zone
Option 5 - Zone is a Radio Zone
Option 6 - Zone is a Stay Mode Zone
Option 7 - Zone can be Manually Bypassed
Option 8 - Zone can be Auto-Bypassed
Option 1
Zone is Active - If this option is on the zone is turned on. If it is turned off the zone will not be monitored by
the panel. The panel can provide up to 16 zones but is configured by default as an 8 zone panel with this
option turned off for zones 9-16.
Option 2
Zone is N/O - This option only applies if the zone input is set to type 14 (zone doubling) at location P125E.
When configured as type 14 there are three resistors wired in series on the input, a 2k2 tamper resistor, a
4k7 low zone resistor and an 8k2 high zone resistor. At this point, the zone can be set as having a N/C
(Normally closed) alarm contact where the EOL resistor is shorted out in the sealed state or it can be set as a
N/O (Normally open) alarm contact where the EOL resistor is in circuit in the sealed state. If this option is
turned on it assumes that the alarm contact is N/O. A proximity reader input is sealed if the input is open
and unsealed if the input is shorted to 0V. If the zone being used is from 1-8 and zone doubling is not being
used (eg P125E for the zone is not set to 14) then this function has no effect. If zone doubling is turned on
and this option is set for N/O operation (option 2 is turned on) the proximity reader input must be shorted
to 0V to seal the zone input.
Option 3
Spare
Option 4
Keypad Zone - If this option is on the Zone will follow the Input at the corresponding Proximity Reader. If
the Proximity Reader is set to Keypad # 1 the input can be either zone 1 or zone 9, eg if P122E1E (zone #1)
had option 4 on then the input at reader one will operate zone 1. If P122E9E (zone #9) had option 4 on then
the input at reader one will operate zone 9. Proximity reader 1 can operate zones 1 or 9 through to
proximity reader 8 can operate zones 8 or 16. If the proximity reader input is left open circuit the zone is
sealed. If the input is shorted to 0V the input becomes unsealed.
Option 5
Zone is a Radio Zone - If this option is on the panel does not scan the hardwired zone input terminal but
instead is looking for a radio zone signal. The correct radio type should be set at location P127E to ensure
that the radio zone works correctly.
Option 6
Zone is a Stay Mode Zone - If this option is on the zone will be active when Stay Mode is armed. This feature
is normally used for arming just part of the alarm at night time.
Option 7
Zone can be Manually Bypassed - If this option is on the zone can be Manually Bypassed at the keypad
using the <BYPASS> button. A zone must be Bypassed while in the disarmed state. A bypassed zone will
also bypass any tampers associated with that zone. Once the area with the bypassed zone has been armed
then disarmed, the manual bypass is removed and the zone must be manually bypassed again before
arming if required. If a zone is configured as a 24 Hour zone (P123E Options 3,4 & 5), they can also Manually
Bypassed but in this case the Bypass must be manually removed to re-instate the zone.
Option 8
Zone can be Auto-Bypassed - If this option is on the zone will be Auto-Bypassed if unsealed at the expiry of
the exit delay. If a zone is unsealed at the time of arming and remains unsealed when the exit delay expires
and this option is on for that zone it will be automatically bypassed by the panel. If the zone seals after that
time it will be re-instated automatically and can then cause an alarm. On disarming of the alarm any autoBypasses are removed.
ZONE OPTIONS B
ZONE OPTIONS B - P123E 1-16E
Option 1 - Zone is a Handover Zone
Option 2 - Zone is a Two Trigger Zone
Option 3 - Zone is a 24 Hour Zone
Option 4 - Zone is a 24 Hour Auto-reset Zone
Option 5 - Zone is a 24 Hour Fire Zone
Option 6 - Spare
Option 7 - Zone is a Chime Zone
Option 8 - Zone is a Permanent Chime Zone
Option 1
Zone is a Handover Zone - A Handover Zone is one that its entry delay will apply provided a Non-Handover
68
entry zone is triggered first. If no other entry delay zones are triggered before the handover zone the entry
delay on that zone does not apply and the alarm will become instant (no entry delay).
Option 2
Zone is a Two Trigger Zone - If this option is on the zone will have to trigger twice within the two trigger
time (P25E5E) before it will cause an alarm. If the zone does not trigger a second time before the two trigger
time expires, the count is reset and it will take another two triggers to cause an alarm on this zone. If more
than one zone is set-up as a two trigger zone, then a single trigger from two separate zones within the two
trigger time can also cause an alarm. If the zone becomes faulty and stays in alarm once triggered it will also
cause an alarm provided it remains in alarm for longer than the two trigger time.
Option 3
Zone is a 24 Hour Zone - If this option is on the zone will be constantly monitored regardless of the arm/
disarm state of the panel. If the 24 Hour zone also has an entry delay programmed (P144E), this delay will
apply. If the 24 Hour zone activates but then resets before the entry delay expires no alarm will be
generated. This feature can be useful for monitoring plant type alarms such as freezer alarms. Once the
alarm has been generated it must be cleared by entry of a valid User code.
Option 4
Zone is a 24 Hour Auto-reset Zone - If this option is on the zone will be constantly monitored regardless of
the arm/disarm state of the panel. If the 24 Hour zone also has an entry delay programmed (P144E), this
delay will apply. If the 24 Hour zone activates but then resets before the entry delay expires no alarm will be
generated. Once an alarm has been generated with a 24 Hour Auto-reset zone, the alarm will be removed
automatically once the input reseals.
Option 5
Zone is a 24 Hour Fire Zone - If this option is on the zone will be constantly monitored regardless of the
arm/disarm state of the panel. If the 24 Hour Fire zone also has an entry delay programmed (P144E), this
delay will apply. If the 24 Hour Fire zone activates but then resets before the entry delay expires no alarm
will be generated. Once the alarm has been generated it must be cleared by entry of a valid User code. The
24 Hour Fire Zone will also cause an alarm output to pulse the alarm to differentiate a fire alarm from a
burglar alarm (ie a fire alarm will switch the output on and off at the pulse timer rate whereas a burglar
alarm on the same output will sound continuously).
Option 6
Spare -
Option 7
Zone is a Chime Zone - If this option is on, the zone will operate Chime mode when disarmed. When the
alarm is armed the Chime Mode is disabled for this zone. A Chime zone can sound the keypad buzzer or
operate an output to indicate that the zone is unsealed. It is normally used to monitor areas during the
daytime.
Option 8
Zone is a Permanent Chime Zone - If this option is on, the zone will operate Chime mode when armed or
disarmed. When the alarm is armed the zone will continue to only be a Chime Mode Zone and will not
cause a burglar alarm. A Chime zone can sound the keypad buzzer or operate an output to indicate that the
zone is unsealed.
ZONE OPTIONS C
ZONE OPTIONS C - P124E 1-16E
Option 1 - Can Arm if Zone is not Ready
Option 2 - Will Send Multiple Reports to Dialler
Option 3 - Zone is Monitored for Inactivity
Option 4 - Zone is on Soak Test
Option 5 - Zone will report to Area B Account Number
Option 6 - Zone will Not Report 24 hour Alarms via Dialler
Option 7 - Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm
Option 8 - Exit Terminator Zone
Option 1
Can Arm if Zone is not Ready - If this option is turned on, plus Options 7 or 8 or on at P45E (cannot Arm if
zones not sealed/Ready), this zone can be unsealed and the panel can still be armed. This option allows the
panel to still be armed if a low security zone is unsealed yet still stopping arming if a high security zone is
unsealed.
Option 2
Will Send Multiple Reports to Dialler - If this option is turned on, a zone will send an alarm report to the
monitoring station every time it is activated. If the option is turned off, the zone can only send one alarm
report per armed cycle.
Option 3
Zone is Monitored for Inactivity - If this option is on the zone will be checked to see that it operates during
the disarmed state. If it is not operated within the time set at P163E a “Sensor-watch” alarm will be
69
generated. This feature is designed to detect a faulty zone that is not operating normally or one that has had
it’s detection area blocked. If a detector has this option turned on and it doesn’t operate when disarmed,
the timer at location P163E will start to count down. The timer is stopped when the area assigned to the
zone is armed and resumes with the saved value when disarmed again. The timer is reset back to the
original value every time the zone operates while disarmed.
Option 4
Zone is a Soak Test Zone - If a zone is suspected of being faulty and is causing false alarms, you can turn it
into a Soak Test Zone and it will still be monitored for alarms when armed but it will not cause the sirens to
sound or report to the dialler. The Soak Test zone will still be logged in the event memory however so it is
possible to check the activity of the zone, via the memory, and after a suitable period of no alarms it can be
re-instated as part of the alarm by removing the Soak Test option.
Option 5
Zone will report to Area B Account Code - If a zone is in Areas A & B and it goes into alarm, it will default to
reporting on the Area A Account Code (see P62E). By turning this option on when a zone is in both areas it
will report to Area B account Code.
Option 6
Zone will Not Report 24 Hour Alarms via Dialler - If this option is turned on and the zone is set as a 24
Hour type, when an alarm is generated, the alarm will not be transmitted to the monitoring station via the
dialler.
Option 7
Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm - If this option is turned on, when an alarm is reported to
monitoring and is kissed off, any Output with Option 4 ON at P36E will pulse for 2 seconds.
Option 8
Exit Terminator Zone - If this option is on, when the zone unseals during the exit delay time and then seals
again the panel will cancel any remaining exit delay time and arm in 3 seconds from the time the zone was
sealed. The zone can also be left unsealed at the time of arming and will terminate the exit delay 3 seconds
after it is sealed. Once armed, the exit terminator zone will cause an alarm if unsealed again (the alarm will
be delayed if an entry delay is programmed (P144E), otherwise it will be instant).
ZONE EOL (End-of-Line) OPTIONS
There are 8 hardwired zone inputs on the panel. Each of these inputs can have different EOL (End-of-Line) configurations
if desired. The input can be a short circuit wire loop (Type 0), one of 11 different single resistor values (Types 1-11), can
provide 8 zones with tamper (Types 12,13), zone doubling to allow for up to 16 zones plus tamper (Type 14), or zone
doubling without tamper (Type 15). See chart on page 6 for the resistor combinations and colour codes. NOTE: If using
vibration settings 1-8 (see P126E below) then this location can ONLY be set to type 3.
ZONE EOL (End-of-Line) OPTIONS - P125E 1-8E
Option 0 - Short Circuit Loop
Option 1 - 1k
Option 2 - 1k5
Option 3 - 2k2
Option 4 - 3k3
Option 5 - 3k9
Option 6 - 4k7
Option 7 - 5k6
Option 8 - 6k8
Option 9 - 10k
Option 10 - 12k
Option 11 - 22k
Option 12 - 2k2
Option 13 - 3k3
Option 14 - 2k2
Option 15 - 4k7
//
//
//
//
4k7
6k8
4k7 // 8k2
8k2
ZONE RESPONSE TIME
There are 8 hardwired zone inputs on the panel. The response time (how quickly the input responds to an input trigger)
can be varied for each zone. The first 8 settings are very fast response times normally used when vibration sensors are
connected to a zone input. Response Settings 1-8 (vibration) can only be applied to zones 1-8 and the zone EOL setting
(P125E) must be set to type 3 (2k2). Zone doubling is not available when vibration settings are used.
The response settings 9-26 start at about 200 ms for setting 9 through to 1.05 sec for setting 26. If zone doubling is
turned on, both zones on an input will have the same response time (eg zones 1 & 9 would have the same time).
ZONE RESPONSE TIME - P126E 1-8E
Response Setting 1 - Highest Vibration setting
Response Setting 2 - Middle Vibration setting
Response Setting 3 - Middle Vibration setting
Response Setting 4 - Middle Vibration setting
Response Setting 5 - Middle Vibration setting
Response Setting 6 - Middle Vibration setting
Response Setting 7 - Middle Vibration setting
Response Setting 8 - Lowest Vibration setting
Response Setting 9 - 200 ms
Response Setting 10 - 250 ms
Response Setting 18 - 650 ms
Response Setting 19 - 700 ms
70
Response Setting 11 - 300 ms
Response Setting 12 - 350 ms
Response Setting 13 - 400 ms
Response Setting 14 - 450 ms
Response Setting 15 - 500 ms
Response Setting 16 - 550 ms
Response Setting 17 - 600 ms
Response Setting 20 - 750 ms
Response Setting 21 - 800 ms
Response Setting 22 - 850 ms
Response Setting 23 - 900 ms
Response Setting 24 - 950 ms
Response Setting 25 - 1000 ms
Response Setting 26 - 1050 ms
RADIO ZONE DETECTOR TYPE
Any of the 16 zones can be made radio zones. There are multiple types of radio detectors that can be used on the panel. It
is important to set the correct radio type for the detector being used so that all of the special functions such as battery
low signals, tamper alarms, reed switch open/close signals and supervision signals can all be monitored correctly.
RADIO ZONE DETECTOR TYPE - P127E 1-16E
Radio Type 0 - Generic
Radio Type 1 - Crow Merlin PIR (supervised signal ignored)
Radio Type 2 - Crow Merlin PIR (supervised signal active)
Radio Type 3 - Freelink with checksum (supervised signal active)
Radio Type 4 - Freelink with checksum (Non-supervised)
Radio Type 5 - Crow AE series battery Low
Radio Type 6 - Crow AE series Radio Reed Switch
Radio Type 11 - Ness Radio devices Battery Low
Radio Type 12 - Ness Radio Reed Switch
Radio Type 31 - Visonic K900 Radio PIR
Radio Type 32 - Visonic Powercode (supervised signal ignored)
Radio Type 33 - Visonic Powercode (supervised signal active)
Radio Type 34 - Siemens (supervised signal ignored)
Radio Type 35 - Siemens (supervised signal active)
Type 0
Generic - If you wish to use a detector that is not on the above list then set the type a “0” and the panel will
still respond to the radio detector every time the learnt code is received.
Type 1
Crow Merlin PIR (unsupervised) - If a Crow Merlin radio PIR is used on the panel select Type 1 so the panel
correctly recognizes the alarm, tamper & battery low signal from the device. The automatic supervised
signal sent every 40 minutes by the PIR is ignored in this mode.
Type 2
Crow Merlin PIR (supervised) - If a Crow Merlin radio PIR is used selecting Type 2 will allow the panel to
correctly recognize the alarm, tamper & battery low signal from the device. Selecting this option also starts
the supervise timer (P25E4E). The supervise timer is constantly being reset while valid supervisory signals
are being received from the detector. If no supervise signals are received from the PIR within the supervise
timer value a supervised alarm is generated.
Type 3
Freelink with checksum (supervised signal active) - If a Crow Freelink radio PIR is used selecting Type 3
will allow the panel to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper & battery low signal from the device. Selecting
this option also starts the supervise timer (P25E4E). The supervise timer is constantly being reset while valid
supervisory signals are being received from the detector. If no supervise signals are received from the PIR
within the supervise timer value a supervised alarm is generated.
Type 4
Freelink with checksum (non-supervised) - If a Crow Freelink radio PIR is used selecting Type 4 will allow
the panel to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper & battery low signal from the device. The automatic
supervisory signal sent by the PIR is ignored in this mode.
Type 5
Crow AE Series Battery Low - If a Crow (AE) radio pendant or PIR is used on the panel selecting Type 5
allows the panel to correctly recognize the battery low and tamper signals from Crow (AE) devices.
Type 6
Crow AE Series Radio Reed Switch - If a Crow (AE) radio reed switch is used on the panel selecting Type 6
allows the panel to correctly recognize the open and closed signals from the reed switch so the zone LED
can follow the correct state of the reed switch (ie open or closed). It also recognizes the battery low signal
from the Crow (AE) device.
Type 11
Ness Battery Low - If a Ness radio pendant or PIR is used on the panel selecting Type 11 allows the panel to
correctly recognize the battery low and tamper signals from Ness devices.
Type 12
Ness Radio Reed Switch - If a Ness radio reed switch is used on the panel selecting Type 12 allows the panel
to correctly recognize the battery low and tamper signals from the Ness device. It also recognizes the open
71
and closed signals from the reed switch so the zone LED can follow the correct state of the reed switch (ie
open or closed)
Type 31
Visonic Radio PIR - If a Visonic K900 radio PIR is used on the panel selecting Type 31 allows the panel to
correctly recognize the alarm, tamper & battery low signal from this device.
Type 32
Visonic Powercode (unsupervised) - If a Visonic Powercode radio device is used on the panel selecting
Type 32 allows the panel to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper and battery low signal from the device.
The supervisory signal sent by the device is ignored in this mode.
Type 33
Visonic Powercode (supervised) - If the Visonic Powercode range of radio PIR or reed switch are used on
the panel selecting Type 33 allows the panel to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper & battery low signals
from the devices as well as the open/close signal from the reed switch. Selecting this option also starts the
supervise timer (P25E4E). The supervise timer is constantly being reset while valid supervisory signals are
being received from the detector. If no supervise signals are received from the PIR within the supervise
timer value a supervised alarm is generated.
Type 34
Siemens (unsupervised) - If a Siemens radio device is used on the panel selecting Type 34 allows the panel
to correctly recognize the alarm, tamper and battery low signal from the device. The supervisory signal sent
by the device is ignored in this mode.
Type 35
Siemens (supervised) - If the Siemens radio PIR is used on the panel selecting Type 35 enables the same
functions as 34 above plus starts the supervise timer (P25E4E). The supervise timer is constantly being reset
while valid supervisory signals are being received from the detector. If no supervise signals are received from
the PIR within the supervise timer value a supervised alarm is generated.
ARMED ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT
ARMED ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT - P128E 1-16E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If an Area is Armed and a zone assigned to that Area activates, the zone can trigger selected Outputs for local alarm
signalling. This location assigns Zones to Outputs for alarms that occur when in the Full Armed State.
STAY MODE ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT
STAY MODE ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT - P129E 1-16E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If an Area has Stay Mode Armed and a zone assigned to that Area activates, the zone can trigger selected Outputs for local
alarm signalling. This location assigns Zones to Outputs for alarms that occur when Stay Mode is Armed.
24 HOUR ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT
24 HOUR ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT - P130E 1-16E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If a zone is programmed as a 24 Hour type and it activates, the zone can trigger selected Outputs for local alarm
signalling. If the zone is a standard 24 hour type (P123E3E) the output will turn for the full reset time, if it is an Auto-reset
type (P123E4E) the output will either turn off when the reset time expires or if the input clears and if it is a Fire type
(P123E5E) the output will pulse at a rate equal to the pulse time for that output.
CHIME ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT
CHIME ZONE ALARMS to OUTPUT - P131E 1-16E
72
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If a zone is programmed as a Chime zone (P123E7E) and it activates, the zone can trigger selected Outputs for local alarm
signalling. The output will operate for the Chime to Output time at location P41E. The zone must clear before the output
can be activated again.
ZONE TAMPER ALARMS to OUTPUT
ZONE TAMPER ALARMS to OUTPUT - P132E 1-16E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If a hardwired zone is programmed to allow tamper monitoring (P125E types 12,13 & 14), or the zone is a radio detector
with tamper, the zone tamper can trigger selected Outputs for local alarm signalling.
ARMED ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
ARMED ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P134E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If an Area is Armed and a zone assigned to that Area activates, the zone can sound the buzzer at selected keypads for local
alarm signalling. This location assigns zone alarm beep to a keypad for alarms that occur when in the Full Armed State.
STAY MODE ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
STAY MODE ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P135E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If an Area is Stay Mode Armed and a zone assigned to that Area activates, the zone can sound the buzzer at selected
keypads for local alarm signalling. This location assigns zone alarm beep to a keypad for alarms that occur when in Stay
Mode is Armed.
24 HOUR ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
24 HOUR ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P136E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If a zone is programmed as a 24 Hour type and it activates, the zone can sound the buzzer at selected keypads for local
alarm signalling. If the zone is a standard 24 hour type (P123E3E) or Fire type (P1235E) the keypad buzzer will sound until
reset by a User but if it is an Auto-reset type (P123E4E) the keypad buzzer will reset when the input clears.
CHIME ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
CHIME ZONE ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P137E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
73
If a zone is programmed as a Chime zone and it activates, the zone can sound the buzzer at selected keypads for local
alarm signalling. The duration of the Chime beep is programmed at location P94E. The Chime function can also be
locally disabled at each keypad individually if not required (see Page 32 for details).
ZONE TAMPER ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
ZONE TAMPER ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P139E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If a hardwired zone is programmed to allow tamper monitoring (P125E types 12,13 & 14), or the zone is a radio
detector with tamper, the zone tamper can beep the keypad buzzer at individual keypads.
RADIO SUPERVISE FAIL BEEPS TO KEYPAD
RADIO SUPERVISE FAIL BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P140E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If a zone is programmed as a radio zone and that type is actively monitoring the supervision signal, a supervise signal
failure from the detector alarm can sound the buzzer at selected Keypads for local alarm signalling.
ZONE INACTIVITY ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD
ZONE INACTIVITY ALARM BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P141E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If the zone is programmed for inactivity monitoring (P124E3E) and it is not operated within the time set at P163E a
“Sensor-watch” alarm will be generated. A “Sensor-watch” failure from the detector can sound the buzzer at selected
Keypads for local alarm signalling.
ARMED ZONE ENTRY DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD
ARMED ZONE ENTRY DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P142E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If the alarm is Armed and a delay zone triggers the entry delay it can also beep the keypad buzzer to warn that the entry
delay is counting down and the alarm should be turned off.
STAY MODE ENTRY DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD
STAY MODE ENTRY DELAY BEEPS TO KEYPAD - P143E 1-16E
Option 1 - Keypad 1
Option 2 - Keypad 2
Option 3 - Keypad 3
Option 4 - Keypad 4
Option 5 - Keypad 5
Option 6 - Keypad 6
Option 7 - Keypad 7
Option 8 - Keypad 8
If Stay Mode is Armed and a Stay Mode delay zone triggers the entry delay it can also beep the keypad buzzer to warn
that the entry delay is counting down and the alarm should be turned off.
74
ARMED ZONE ENTRY DELAY TIME
ARMED ZONE ENTRY DELAY TIME - P144E 1-16E (Value 0-9999 Seconds)
Each Zone has it’s own Entry Delay time when in the Full Armed State. The delay can be programmed from 0-9999
seconds in one second increments. If the entry delay is set to “0” the zone will be an instant zone.
STAY MODE ZONE ENTRY DELAY TIME
STAY MODE ZONE ENTRY DELAY TIME - P145E 1-16E (Value 0-9999 Seconds)
Each Zone has it’s own Entry Delay time when in Stay Mode. The delay can be programmed from 0-9999 seconds in one
second increments. If the entry delay is set to “0” the zone will be an instant zone.
ZONE RE-TRIGGER COUNT
ZONE RE-TRIGGER COUNT - P146E 1-15E (Value 0-15 Triggers)
Each Zone has it’s own alarm Re-trigger Count. A value of 0 programmed at this location results in unlimited alarms for
that zone during an armed period but a count of 1-15 will shut down the zone once the programmed count has been
reached. Disarming the alarm will reset this count.
ZONE ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE
ZONE ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P157E 1-16E (3 digit event code)
Normally a zone alarm would default to reporting a standard “Burglar Alarm” code of “130” when the zone activates. If
the zone is not being used as a burglar alarm and you need to identify the correct type of alarm event you can change
the event code at this location (eg if zone 5 was a fire sensor you could program a value of “110” at P157E5E).
ZONE NEAR ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE
ZONE NEAR ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P158E 1-16E (3 digit event code)
If the Near & Confirmed zone alarm reporting option was active the default report code for a “Near Alarm” is “138”
when the zone activates for the first time. There should be no reason to change this code but if some special application
was to be used it can be changed at this location.
ZONE CONFIRMED ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT
CODE
ZONE CONFIRMED ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P159E 1-16E (3 digit event code)
If the Near & Confirmed zone alarm reporting option was active the default report code for a “Confirmed Alarm” is
“139” when a second zone activates within 45 minutes of the near alarm. There should be no reason to change this
code but if some special application was to be used it can be changed at this location.
ZONE ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER
ZONE ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER - P160E 1-16E (Value 0-99)
If the Optional Voice Board is fitted and the alarms are to be reported in Voice Format, each zone can be assigned a
voice message to report the alarm type. If this location is set to “0” the zone will not report via the dialler. If Option 1 at
P46E is turned on (use near and confirmed alarm reporting) the panel will not send an alarm in this format.
ARMED ENTRY DELAY to OUTPUT
ARMED ENTRY DELAY to OUTPUT - P161E 1-16E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If the alarm is Armed and a delay zone triggers the entry delay it can also beep an Output to warn that the entry delay is
counting down and the alarm should be turned off.
75
STAY MODE ENTRY DELAY to OUTPUT
STAY MODE ENTRY DELAY to OUTPUT - P162E 1-16E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If Stay Mode is Armed and a delay zone triggers the entry delay it can also beep an Output to warn that the entry delay is
counting down and the alarm should be turned off.
SENSOR-WATCH TIME
SENSOR-WATCH TIME - P163E 1-16E (Value 0-9999 Minutes)
If the zone is programmed as a “Sensor-Watch” zone (P124E3E) and it is not operated within the time set at this location
a “Sensor-watch” alarm will be generated. If a detector has this option turned on and it doesn’t operate when disarmed,
this timer will start to count down for the zone/s concerned. The timer is stopped when the area assigned to the zone/s is
armed and resumes with the saved value when disarmed again. The timer is reset back to the original value every time
the zone operates while disarmed.
LEARN RADIO ZONE CODES
LEARN RADIO ZONE CODES - P164E 1-16E
A RADIO Zone must be enrolled into the panel before it can be used.
To learn a Radio Zone you must first have a compatible receiver connected to the panel keypad buss. With the receiver
connected and the panel in program mode, entering P164E then the zone number you wish to enrol, eg 5E for zone 5, the
keypad will start to beep to indicate that learn mode has been started and the LED on the receiver will flash. Now operate
the detector you wish to learn into Zone 5 slot. Once the transmitted code has been received by the panel and saved, the
keypad will stop beeping and the LED on the receiver will stop flashing.
When learning a new radio zone the panel checks all possible locations (including pendants) before saving the new code
to ensure that the code has not already been loaded into another slot. If the code already exists, the keypad will indicate
which slot the code is already installed at. A number from 1-16 indicates a zone slot and a number from 21-100 indicates
a user slot.
DELETE a RADIO ZONE CODE
DELETE a RADIO ZONE CODE - P165E 1-16E
If you wish to delete a single Radio Zone, pressing P165E then the Zone number while in Program Mode will delete the
stored code against that Zone, eg P165E 5E will remove the code stored for Zone 5.
FIND a ZONE LOCATION
FIND a RADIO ZONE LOCATION - P166E 0E
If you have a Radio detector loaded into the panel but are unsure which location (Zone #), pressing P166E then 0E while
in Program Mode on an LED Keypad will start “Find” Mode. There is no need to press 0E when using an LCD keypad
because the keypad will give you written prompts after entering P166E. The keypad will start to beep to indicate that
“Find” mode has been started and the LED on the Receiver will flash. Now operate the Radio Detector you wish to find. If
the Radio Detector is in memory the keypad will display the number (1-16 indicates a zone, and 21-100 indicates a user).
The keypad will stop beeping and the LED on the Receiver will stop flashing.
ZONE NEAR ALARM to OUTPUT
ZONE NEAR ALARM to OUTPUT - P167E 1-16E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If zones are programmed for near and confirmed alarms (P64E option 1 on), it is also possible to get an indication of a
Near Alarm from any of the 8 Outputs using this program location. A Near Alarm is the first alarm during an armed
period.
76
ZONE CONFIRMED ALARM to OUTPUTS
ZONE COMFIRMED ALARM to OUTPUT - P168E 1-16E
Option 1 - Output 1
Option 2 - Output 2
Option 3 - Output 3
Option 4 - Output 4
Option 5 - Output 5
Option 6 - Output 6
Option 7 - Output 7
Option 8 - Output 8
If zones are programmed for near and confirmed alarms (P64E option 1 on), it is also possible to get an indication of a
Confirmed Alarm from any of the 8 Outputs using this program location. A Confirmed Alarm is the second alarm from a
different zone to the one that caused the Near Alarm and must happen within 45 minutes of the near alarm.
TIME ZONES
HOLIDAYS
HOLIDAYS - P170E 1-8E (DDMMYY)
It is possible to pre-program up to 8 holidays. Holidays can override the time-zone function on the programmed day. For
example, if an output was automatically controlled by a time-zone, the pre-programmed holidays can stop the output
from turning on or off on a holiday. A holiday consists of a single day programmed by Date/Month/Year (DDMMYY). The
holiday begins at the start of the day (00:00:00) and finishes immediately before midnight (23:59:59) on the
programmed date. Holidays can be programmed in any order (although for simplicity it is recommended that they are
programmed in chronological order) and the panel automatically removes them once the day ends. If you wish to
manually remove a programmed holiday you must program in 000000 at the holiday location. If the holiday date you are
attempting to enter is older than the current date the panel will not save the data eg if the current date was 111204
(11th of December 2004) and you tried to enter in 101204 (10th of December 2004) the panel will not save the
programmed holiday as the day has already elapsed.
TIME ZONE DAYS
TIMEZONE DAYS - P171E 1-8E
Option 1 - Sunday
Option 2 - Monday
Option 3 - Tuesday
Option 4 - Wednesday
Option 5 - Thursday
Option 6 - Friday
Option 7 - Saturday
Option 8 - Invert
The Time-zone days are the days that the time-zone will be active. You can select any combination of the days, eg days
2,3,4,5,6 for Monday to Friday or 1&7 for Saturday & Sunday, etc. The invert function selects all times outside those
selected. There are 8 Time-zones that can be programmed.
TIME ZONE START TIME
TIMEZONE START TIME - P172E 1-8E (HHMM)
The Time-zone start time is when the time-zone begins. It would normally be set to the beginning of the day, eg if you
were automatically arming and disarming an area with a time-zone and you wanted it to disarm when the time-zone
started you would set the start time to about 0830. The start time is programmed in 24 hour format (eg 0000-2359).
If you are setting up the time-zone during the active period (eg if the time-zone goes from 0830-1700 and the current
time is 1200) you will have to wait until the next minute expires before the panel will update the time-zone status. You
can see if the time-zone is active at location P200E4E.
TIME ZONE END TIME
TIMEZONE END TIME - P173E 1-8E (HHMM)
The Time-zone end time is when the time-zone finishes. It would normally be set to the end of the day, eg if you were
automatically arming and disarming an area with a time-zone and you wanted it to arm when the time-zone ended you
would set the end time to about 1700. The Time-zone end is active at the end of the programmed minute eg if the timezone end time was set to 1700, the actual time that the time-zone operates will be at 17:01. The end time is programmed
in 24 hour format (eg 0000-2359)
77
TIME ZONE OPTIONS
TIMEZONE OPTIONS - P174E 1-8E
1 = Ignore Holidays
2-8 = Spare
If option 1 is turned on for a Time-zone, that time-zone will not be disabled when a holiday occurs. Normally when a
holiday occurs all Time-zones will be disabled but if this option is turned on the Time-zone will not be affected when a
holiday is active.
DIALLER
DIALLER OPTIONS
DIALLER OPTIONS - P175E 1E
Option 1 - Dialler is Enabled
Option 2 - Fax Defeat
Option 3 - Disable Telephone Line Monitoring
Option 4 - Pulse Dialling (NOTE: For DTMF 4 & 5 must be OFF)
Option 5 - Reverse Pulse Dialling (NOTE: For DTMF 4 & 5 must be OFF)
Option 6 - Long DTMF Dialling Digits
Option 7 - Auto-detect Modem
Option 8 - Force V21 Mode
Option 1
Dialler is Enabled - If this option is turned off the dialler will be disabled. The option must be on to allow the
dialler to make calls.
Option 2
Fax Defeat - The panel can automatically answer an in-coming call in two ways. The first is to set the autoanswer ring count to a convenient number (P175E4E) and let the phone ring until this number is reached at
which time the panel will answer the call. The second method is to use fax defeat which entails calling the
panel and letting it ring no more than 3 times, hanging up, then ringing back within 45 seconds. The panel
will now answer the call on the first ring. There is also a manual answer function described on page 36.
Option 3
Disable Telephone line Monitoring - If the panel is connected to a poor telephone line and the line failure
alarm is appearing regularly, by turning this option on the panel will not do the line test.
Option 4
Pulse Dial - If this option is Off the panel will dial in DTMF format, if On then the panel will dial using Pulse
Dialling format
Option 5
Reverse Pulse Dial - If this option is On, and option 4 is On, then the panel will dial using Reverse Pulse
Dialling format (eg the number 9 = 1 pulse). If this option is Off and Option 4 is On, the panel will dial in
normal Pulse format (eg the number 9 = 9 pulses).
Option 6
Long DTMF Dialling Digits - If this option is Off, the panel will dial using normal dialling (75ms on & 75ma
off). If it is On, the panel will dial using the long tones (100ms on & 100ms off).
Option 7
Auto-detect Modem - If this option is on the panel will answer an in-coming call with the V21 acknowledge
tone. If the modem does not respond within 5 seconds the panel will then generate the acknowledge tones
for BELL103 format. It will repeat this cycle twice and then hang-up if no communication with a modem is
established.
Option 8
Force V21 Mode - The dial up panel to PC link can be established using either Bell 103 or V21. If the autodetect function at option 7 does not result in the best format for your modem then you can force the panel
to only communicate in one format. If the LED is off the format is BELL103, LED on means V21.
DIALLER OPTIONS 2
DIALLER OPTIONS 2 - P175E 2E
Option 1 - Step to next Number
Option 2 - Upload/download uses Call-back Number
Option 3 - Upload/download only if Disarmed
Option 4 - Send Test Calls Only if Armed
Option 5 - Test Time Period is in days
Option 6 - Hold line open following Domestic/Voice report for DTMF control
Option 7 - First to Open Last to Close Reporting
Option 8 - Answer After 1 ring for Two Way Voice Call-back Mode
78
Option 1
Step to next Number - If more than one telephone number is programmed, this option will force the dialler
to step through each number after a call. If this option is off the dialler will make all calls to the first number
before moving on to the next number.
Option 2
Upload/download uses Call-back Number - A Telephone number can be programmed as a Call-back
number. If this option is turned on, and a PC contacts the panel a direct connection cannot be made with
the PC. The panel will hang-up the call and dial the PC back on the Call-back number. The PC user can only
select the “Call-back” option to make a connection with the panel if this option is turned on. For some
modems you might have to program the reporting format for the call-back number to be type “0” otherwise
the panel may not connect with the modem during a call-back request.
Option 3
Upload/download only if Disarmed - If this option is turned on, and a PC attempts to contact the panel
while the alarm is Armed a direct connection cannot be made as the panel will not answer the call. If the
panel is Disarmed a connection can be established.
Option 4
Send Test Calls Only if Armed - If this option is On the panel will only send a daily test call if it is Armed. This
option assumes that the normal arm/disarm signals sent on a daily basis can serve as a test and that the
connection only needs to be verified daily if the panel is left in the armed state for periods longer than 24
hours.
Option 5
Test Time Period is in days - If this option is turned off the test time period (P175E5E) will be set in hours. If
this option is turned on the test time period will be in days.
Option 6
Hold line open following Domestic/Voice report for DTMF control - If this option is On the dialler will
keep the telephone line open after being kissed-off following a Domestic or Voice alarm call so that the
person at the phone can then use their DTMF codes to arm/disarm the system or turn on the optional
microphone if required.
Option 7
First to Open Last to Close Reporting - If this option is on and the alarm is split into two Areas, then the
“Arm” report to the monitoring station will only be sent when both areas are armed and it will be a single
report on Area A account code (last to close). On Disarming of the alarm the disarm report will be sent
when either Area is disarmed (first to open). Only one disarm report will be sent using the Area A account
code. If zones in both areas are bypassed, the bypass report for all zones will only be sent when both areas
are armed (last to close) but the Bypass restore reports will be sent only when the Area associated with the
zone is disarmed. In this way if an area remains armed and it’s associated bypassed zone/s are still bypassed
the monitoring station knows that the bypasses have not been removed yet.
Option 8
Answer After 1 ring for Two Way Voice Call-back Mode - If this option is turned ON and a full duplex voice
board is fitted, the panel will answer an in-coming call after 1 ring and automatically enter full duplex two
way voice mode. For full duplex voice mode to be active for call-back, option 5 at P183E must be turned OFF.
See also the instructions on Page 118
AUTO-ANSWER RING COUNT
AUTO-ANSWER RING COUNT - P175E 3E (Value 0-99)
If the dialler is set to answer an in-coming call for remote control or upload/download the number of rings before
answering the call can be set at this location. There is also a manual answer function described on page 36.
TEST CALL START TIME
TEST CALL START TIME - P175E 4E (Value 0000-2359)
If the dialler is set to send Automatic Test Calls, the start time for the first call is set at this location. This allows the test call
to be linked to a quiet period where the line would not normally be used (eg 2300)
TEST CALL TIME PERIOD
TEST CALL TIME PERIOD - P175E 5E (Value 0-255 Hours)
When reporting in Contact ID format the panel can send regular test calls to the monitoring company to check the
integrity of the panel and the line. The regularity of the test calls is set at this location. It would normally be set to a value
of 24 so that a test call is sent one a day. The start time for the first test should also be set at location P175E5E.
79
KEYPAD LISTEN-IN OPTIONS
KEYPAD LISTEN-IN OPTIONS - P175E 6E
Option 1 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Disarmed State
Option 2 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Armed State
Option 3 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Monitor Mode
Option 4 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Disarmed state
Option 5 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Armed State
Option 6 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Monitor Mode
Option 7 - Listen-in Enabled when the panel answers a call
Option 8 - Listen-in on at All Times
The panel provides the facilities to use the buzzer in the keypad as a speaker to listen to the call being made by the
dialler. To use this feature a 5th wire must be connected between the panel and a keypad using the listen-in terminals.
The options above allow many combinations of the listen-in to be used or it can be disabled by selecting no options.
OUTPUT # 1 LISTEN-IN OPTIONS
OUTPUT # 1 LISTEN-IN OPTIONS - P175E 7E
Option 1 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Disarmed State
Option 2 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Armed State
Option 3 - Listen-in Enabled when dialling only and in Monitor Mode
Option 4 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Disarmed state
Option 5 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Armed State
Option 6 - Listen-in Enabled through the entire call only in Monitor Mode
Option 7 - Listen-in Enabled when the panel answers a call
Option 8 - Listen-in on at All Times
The panel provides the facilities to use a speaker connected to Output # 1 to listen to the call being made by the dialler.
For this to happen the device connected to output # 1 must be an 8Ώ horn speaker. The options above allow many
combinations of the listen-in to be used or it can be disabled by selecting no options.
DIALLING PRE-FIX NUMBER
DIALLING PRE-FIX NUMBER - P175E 8E (Value 1-16 digits)
The panel can be programmed with a Pre-fix telephone number. The Pre-fix number can be up 16 digits long. The Pre-fix
number can be dialled before any of the 8 Telephone numbers if required (P183E Option 7).
“PANIC” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE
“PANIC” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P175E 9E (3 digit event code)
Normally a keypad initiated Panic alarm would default to reporting a standard “Panic Alarm” code of “120”. If the panic
alarm is being used for some other purpose and you need to identify the correct type of alarm event you can change the
event code at this location.
“FIRE” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE
“FIRE” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P175E 10E (3 digit event code)
Normally a keypad initiated Fire alarm would default to reporting a standard “Fire Alarm” code of “110”. If the fire alarm is
being used for some other purpose and you need to identify the correct type of alarm event you can change the event
code at this location.
“MEDICAL” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE
“MEDICAL” ALARM CONTACT ID REPORT CODE - P175E 11E (3 digit event code)
Normally a keypad initiated Medical alarm would default to reporting a standard “Medical Alarm” code of “100”. If the
80
medical alarm is being used for some other purpose and you need to identify the correct type of alarm event you can
change the event code at this location.
OUTPUT DTMF CONTROL CODE NUMBER
OUTPUT DTMF CONTROL CODE NUMBER - P175E 12E (Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)
The panel can be configured to allow remote operation of the Outputs via a remote telephone. The code programmed at
this address is the DTMF code that must be used when performing this function. When dialling the panel and it has
answered the call, after waiting for the panel modem tones to stop you can enter in the 4 digit DTMF code plus the
Output number you wish to control, eg <1> for Output # 1, and the current status will be given of the Output associated
with the code entered. After that, if you press the “*” button on the telephone the status of the output will toggle eg if is
was previously On it will change to Off or vice versa. When finished you simply hang-up and 15 seconds later the panel
will release the line.
MICROPHONE ON/OFF DTMF CODE NUMBER
MICROPHONE ON/OFF DTMF CODE NUMBER - P175E 13E (Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)
The panel can be configured to allow remote listen-in via an on-site microphone. The Voice Board must be fitted for the
microphone feature to be available The code programmed at this address is the DTMF code that must be used when
turning the microphone On or Off. When dialling the panel and it has answered the call, after waiting for the panel
modem tones to stop you can enter in the 4 digit DTMF code plus the <*> button on the telephone. This will turn the
Microphone On. By Pressing the <*> button again the microphone will be turned Off. When finished you simply hang-up
and 15 seconds later the panel will release the line.
DIALLER ACKNOWLEDGE DTMF CODE NUMBER
DIALLER ACKNOWLEDGE DTMF CODE NUMBER - P175E 14E (Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)
If the panel is set to report in Domestic or Voice reporting formats, you can simply kiss-off (acknowledge) the alarm by
pressing the <#> button on the remote telephone. Alternatively if you require a more secure kiss-off method to ensure
that the alarm is only kissed off by the correct person you can program a 1-4 digit code at this location. If a code is
programmed at this location you must enter in the code followed by the <#> button to kiss-off the alarm event. This
code is also used in conjunction with the two way voice function. See also the instructions on Page 118
FORCE TEST CALL DTMF CODE NUMBER
FORCE TEST CALL DTMF CODE NUMBER - P175E 15E (Value 1-4 digit code 0-9999)
If a user wishes to remotely force a test call from the panel to a monitoring company using the Contact ID test message,
you can dial the panel and when it answers enter the code programmed at this location on the telephone. If a voice
board is fitted you can assign a voice message (see P176E11E below) to indicate that the function was started. If no voice
board is fitted but there is a DTMF IC fitted to the panel you will get 3 short beeps after the code is entered to indicate the
function was started. Once you hang-up the phone the panel will then make a call to the monitoring company and send a
manual test call message. If no code is programmed at this location (ie “0”) the function will be disabled. The code can be
a 1-4 digit number as required.
NOTE: If using this remote test code and any of the other remote DTMF codes at locations (P63E, P175E12E, P175E13E &
P175E14E) you should make this code a 4 digit code to ensure the panel knows what function is being operated. If no
other DTMF remote functions are being used this code can be a single digit. It is also possible to force a locally generated
test call from the panel keypad by pressing and holding the <CONTROL> button then <0> within two seconds of
pressing control. This will force a test call to the monitoring company.
MISCELLANEOUS VOICE BOARD REPORT
MESSAGES
KEYPAD or RADIO PANIC ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER FIRE ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER MEDICAL ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER MAINS FAIL ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER MAINS RESTORE VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER BATTERY LOW ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER 81
P176E 1E (Value 0-99)
P176E 2E (Value 0-99)
P176E 3E (Value 0-99)
P176E 4E (Value 0-99)
P176E 5E (Value 0-99)
P176E 6E (Value 0-99)
P176E 7E (Value 0-99)
P176E 8E (Value 0-99)
P176E 9E (Value 0-99)
P176E 10E (Value 0-99)
P176E 11E (Value 0-99)
BATTERY RESTORE VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER TAMPER ALARMS VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER DURESS ALARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER LATCHKEY DISARM VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER MANUAL TEST CALL INITIATED VOICE MESSAGE NUMBER -
If a Voice Board is connected to the panel it is possible to send various alarm messages to identify the type of alarm If the
above locations are programmed with a “0” then the event will not report in Voice or Domestic format.
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
TELEPHONE NUMBERS - P181E 1-8E (Value 1-16 digit number)
The Telephone Numbers can be up to 16 digits long. They can also include some special functions or characters as per the
chart below.
TELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT FORMATS
TELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT FORMATS - P182E 1-8E
Option 0 - No reporting
Option 1 - Contact ID
Option 2 - Domestic Dial
Option 3 - Pager
Option 4 - Voice Dialler
Option 6 - 4 + 2 (Pulsed) 10 pps (1400 hz Handshake, 1900 hz transmit Tone)
Option 6 - 4 + 2 (Pulsed) 10 pps (2300 hz Handshake, 1800 hz transmit Tone)
Option 7 - 4 + 2 (Pulsed) 20 pps (1400 hz Handshake, 1900 hz transmit Tone)
Option 8 - 4 + 2 (Pulsed) 20 pps (2300 hz Handshake, 1800 hz transmit Tone)
Option 9 - 4 + 2 DTMF (with Checksum)
Option 10 - SIA
Option 11 - SIA Slow
Option 0
No Reporting - If the option is programmed as “0”, the panel will not report in any format for the selected
telephone number. If the number is to be used as a Call-back number this option should be programmed as
a “0”.
Option 1
Contact ID - If this option is set for the telephone number, the panel will send a Contact ID message to a
Monitoring Station.
Option 2
Domestic Dial - If this option is set for the telephone number, the panel is expecting to dial a residential
telephone number when an alarm occurs. The message sent consists of a siren tone over the phone to alert
the person called that an alarm is in progress. The alarm can be cancelled by the person called by pressing
the “#” button on a touch tone phone during the quiet period. If there is a code programmed at location
P175E14E the alarm must be kissed off by entering in the code then “#”. If the alarm is cancelled by a valid
user code the dialler will stop any further calls. If Option 1 at P46E is turned on (use near and confirmed
alarm reporting) the panel will not send an alarm in this format.
Option 3
Pager - Report alarm events using "Pager" format. This format utilizes Telecom’s 026 pager network or other
public subscriber networks, etc, to send numeric messages to a compatible pager. The panel sends a 12 digit
numeric number to the pager consisting of the account code (P62E) the 3 digit CID event code for the alarm
event and a 3 digit zone number to identify the zone in alarm.
Option 4
Voice Dialler - If the optional voice board is fitted to the panel then selecting this option for the telephone
number will allow preset voice messages to be sent via the telephone following an alarm. The kiss off
method to acknowledge the alarm message is the same as the Domestic Format. If Option 1 at P46E is
turned on (use near and confirmed alarm reporting) the panel will not send an alarm in this format.
Option 5
4 + 2 (10 pps) - This option transmits a 4 digit account code followed by a 2 digit event code to a central
monitoring station. The handshake tone from the monitoring station must be 1400hz and the transmit tone
from the panel will be at 1900hz at 10 pulses per second.
82
Option 6
4 + 2 (10 pps) - This option transmits a 4 digit account code followed by a 2 digit event code to a central
monitoring station. The handshake tone from the monitoring station must be 2300hz and the transmit tone
from the panel will be at 1800hz at 10 pulses per second.
Option 7
4 + 2 (20 pps) - This option transmits a 4 digit account code followed by a 2 digit event code to a central
monitoring station. The handshake tone from the monitoring station must be 1400hz and the transmit tone
from the panel will be at 1900hz at 20 pulses per second.
Option 8
4 + 2 (20 pps) - This option transmits a 4 digit account code followed by a 2 digit event code to a central
LED KEYPAD
BUTTON
LED KEYPAD
INDICATION
LCD KEYPAD
BUTTON
LCD KEYPAD
CID & 4+2
INDICATIONS
LCD KEYPAD
TELEPHONE INDICATIONS
“BYPASS”
-
CONTROL & 0
-
“PANIC”
11
CONTROL & 2
“MEMORY”
12
“CONTROL”
CID & 4+2
SPECIAL
CHARACTERS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
SPECIAL FUNCTION
DELETE #
DELETE #
DELETE #
B
#
“B”
“#”
CONTROL & 3
C
*
“C”
“*”
13
CONTROL & 4
D
-
“D”
“2.5 sec Pause”
“ARM”
14
CONTROL & 5
E
w
“E”
“Wait for 2nd Dial-tone”
“STAY”
15
CONTROL & 6
F
=
“F”
“5 sec Pause”
monitoring station. The handshake tone from the monitoring station must be 2300hz and the transmit tone
from the panel will be at 1800hz at 20 pulses per second
Option 9
4 + 2 (DTMF) - This option transmits a 4 digit account code followed by a 2 digit event code plus a
checksum using DTMF signals to a central monitoring station. The handshake tone from the monitoring
station must be 1400 hz /2300 hz .
Option 10
SIA - This option selects FSK SIA format. If using SIA format, ensure that the monitoring receiver does not
generate a 4+2 2300hz acknowledge tone before the SIA acknowledge tone because the 4+2 tone accuracy
is +/– 5% which can make it the same as the SIA acknowledge tone. Also when reporting alarms on different
areas (1 =Area A and 2 = Area B) the panel will send the area number associated with each event (ri01 or
ri02) but it will also send different account codes if programmed that way. To avoid using two account
numbers when reporting alarms on different areas you should program both account codes (P62E 1 & 2) to
be the same number and identifying the two areas by the area number sent.
Option 11
SIA Slow - This option selects FSK SIA Slow format. This format is similar to option 10 except every signal will
be sent separately with a kissoff after each signal whereas option 10 will send all signals in one continuous
burst with one kissoff at the end. In SIA slow the area number is not sent (see option 10 above) so each
account code must be different when identifying alarms for both areas.
TELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT OPTIONS
TELEPHONE NUMBER REPORT OPTIONS - P183E 1-8E
Option 1 - Stop Dialling if Kissed Off
Option 2 - Monitor Call Progress
Option 3 - Blind Dial
Option 4 - Use Group Numbers for Contact ID Reporting
Option 5 - Stay On-line after Alarm report for two way voice
Option 6 - Auto Kiss-off for Voice/Domestic Reporting
Option 7 - Use the Dial Pre-fix Number
Option 8 - Used as the Call-back Number
Option 1
Stop if Kissed Off - If this option is turned on for the telephone number, the dialler will stop sending the
alarm if the signal is kissed off and will not proceed with any other telephone numbers for that event. If not
kissed off the dialler will start dialling any other programmed numbers. If the event is not kissed off from any
of the telephone numbers and the maximum re-tries limit is reached then the event is marked as unsent
and will be added to the next event that causes the dialler to report. If this option is off, the dialler will send
83
the event for the maximum re-tries count or until kissed off but it will then proceed to report the same
event to any other telephone numbers programmed.
Option 2
Monitor Call Progress - Monitor call progress means that the dialler monitors the status of the dialling
tones to determine whether the call is valid or not. If the call is not valid, eg engaged, the panel will know
and hang up the call and try again.
Option 3
Blind Dial - When the dialler makes a call it looks for dial tone before making the call. If no dial tone is
detected the panel hangs up and attempts another call. The panel will do this 3 times and if dial tone is still
not detected it will make the call anyway. If blind dial is on, the panel skips the dial tone detection and dials
4 seconds after looping the line (used where non standard or low level dial tone exists).
Option 4
Use Group Numbers for Contact ID Reporting - When sending an alarm using Contact ID, the panel can
send separate account codes to report the two areas or, use one account code (P62E1E Area A) and use the
group number to identify the two areas. Turning this option on sends one account with group numbers.
Option 5
Stay On-line after Alarm report for two way voice - If this option is turned ON and a full duplex two way
voice board is fitted, the panel will send a command to the monitoring company in CID or SIA formats to tell
the receiver to stay on-line so the operator can listen or talk to the site (full duplex two way voice). See also
the instructions on Page 118.
Option 6
Auto Kiss-off for Voice/Domestic reporting - If Voice or Domestic Report Format is used and this option is
turned On, the alarm will be reported and it can be kissed off by entering the kiss-off code (P175E14E) at the
telephone but if not kissed off the event is automatically removed from the dialler buffer once the
maximum dial re-tries has been reached for the telephone number. A new event must then be created
before the dialler will dial again.
Option 7
Use the Dial Pre-fix Number - If the Telephone number does not provide sufficient digits for dialling
purposes it is possible to program a dial pre-fix number (P175E8E). The pre-fix can be dialled before the
telephone number. Turning this option on dials the pre-fix first followed by the telephone number.
Option 8
Used as the Call-back Number - Any of the 8 telephone numbers can be designated as the Call-back
number. A Call-back number is normally used to allow the panel to dial a preset number and connect to a
modem for upload/download purposes. Some modems may generate tones during a Call-back operation
that can confuse the panel unless the reporting format (P182E) is programmed as “0”.
MAXIMUM DIAL RE-TRIES per TELEPHONE
NUMBER
MAXIMUM DIAL RE-TRIES per TELEPHONE NUMBER - P184E 1-8E (Value 0-99)
The maximum dial re-tries is the number of times that the panel will dial a telephone number in an attempt to get kissedoff.
DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “A”
DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “A” - P186E 1-8E
Option 1 - Report Mains Fail
Option 2 - Report Battery Low
Option 3 - Report Radio Battery Low
Option 4 - Report Line Fail
Option 5 - Report System Tamper
Option 6 - Report Keypad Tamper
Option 7 - Report Zone Tamper
Option 8 - Report Radio Zone Tamper
Option 1
Report Mains Fail - If this option is on the panel will report a Mains fail after the report delay time (P25E6E)
has expired.
Option 2
Report Battery Low - If this option is on the panel will report a Battery Low.
Option 3
Report Radio Battery Low - If this option is on the panel will report a Battery Low from any radio zones that
84
have the battery status monitored.
Option 4
Report Line Fail - If this option is on the panel will report a Telephone Line fail. The panel will send the line
fail and the line restore at the same time.
Option 5
Report System Tamper - If this option is on the panel will report a Tamper Alarm on the panel tamper input.
Option 6
Report Keypad Tamper - If this option is on the panel will report a Tamper Alarm from a keypad fitted with
a tamper switch or a wrong code alarm from a keypad.
Option 7
Report Radio Zone Tamper - If this option is on the panel will report a Radio Zone Tamper Alarm.
DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “B”
DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “B” - P187E 1-8E
Option 1 - Report Duress
Option 2 - Report Supervised Radio Alarm
Option 3 - Report Zone Inactivity Alarm
Option 4 - Report Manual Panic Alarm
Option 5 - Report Manual Fire Alarm
Option 6 - Report Manual Medical Alarm
Option 7 - Report Radio Pendant Panic Alarm
Option 8 - Report Zone Bypasses
Option 1
Report Duress - If this option is on the panel will report a Duress Alarm (see P25E2E).
Option 2
Report Supervised Radio Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Supervised radio Alarm (see
P25E4E).
Option 3
Report Zone Inactivity Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Zone Inactivity (Sensor-watch)
Alarm (see P163E).
Option 4
Report Manual Panic Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Keypad generated Panic Alarm.
Option 5
Report Manual Fire Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Keypad generated Fire Alarm.
Option 6
Report Manual Medical Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Keypad generated Medical Alarm.
Option 7
Report Radio Pendant Panic Alarm - If this option is on the panel will report a Panic Alarm generated by a
radio key (pendant).
Option 8
Report Zone Bypasses - If this option is on the panel will report a Manual or Auto Bypass on a zone.
DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “C”
DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “C” - P188E 1-8E
Option 1 - Report Arm/Disarm
Option 2 - Report Stay Mode Arm/Disarm
Option 3 - Report Disarm only after an Alarm
Option 4 - Report Stay Mode Disarm only after an Alarm
Option 5 - Report Stay Mode Zone Alarms
Option 6 - Report Access to Program Mode
Option 7 - Report 24 Hour Alarms for Domestic/Voice Formats
Option 8 - Report Zone Restores
Option 1
Report Arm/Disarm - If this option is on then all Arm/Disarm signals will be reported to a Monitoring
Station if Contact ID or 4 + 2 is set as the reporting format.
Option 2
Report Stay Mode Arm/Disarm - If this option is on then all Stay Mode Arm/Disarm signals will be reported
to a Monitoring Station if Contact ID or 4 + 2 is set as the reporting format.
Option 3
Send Disarm only after an Alarm - If this option is on, the panel will not normally send an Arm/Disarm
signal to the monitoring company, however, if a zone alarm occurs then the panel will send a Disarm
following the disarming of the panel to show it has been turned off by a valid user.
85
Option 4
Send Stay Mode Disarm only after an Alarm - If this option is on, the panel will not normally send a Stay
Mode Arm/Disarm signal to the monitoring company, however, if a zone alarm occurs then the panel will
send a Stay Mode Disarm following the disarming of the panel to show it has been turned off by a valid user.
Option 5
Report Stay Mode Zone Alarms - If this option is on, the panel will report zone alarms in Stay Mode.
Option 6
Report Access to Program Mode - If this option is on the panel will report a Contact ID code to indicate that
either Client or Installer program Modes have been accessed.
Option 7
Report 24 Hour Alarms for Domestic/Voice Formats - When the panel is set to send alarms via domestic or
voice mode, No alarms will normally be sent for 24 hour zones. If 24 hour alarms are required to be
reported in Domestic/Voice mode then this option must be turned on.
Option 8
Report Zone Restores - If this option is on the panel will report all zone restores in Contact ID or 4 + 2
formats. If this option is turned off the panel will only report the alarms.
DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “D”
DIALLER REPORTING OPTIONS “D” - P189E 1-8E
Option 1 - Report Latchkey Disarm
Option 2 - Report Delinquency Alarm
Option 3 - Report Test Calls
Option 4 - Report Fuse Failure
Option 5 - Report Output 1 or 2 Fail
Option 6 - Report RTC (Real Time Clock) Time changed
Option 7 - Report Keypad Buss Trouble
Option 8 - Report RF Interference (Jamming) Detected
Option 1
Report Latchkey Disarm - If the panel is armed in Latchkey Report Mode by using a Code, Key-switch,
<ARM>, <STAY>, <A> or <B> buttons, any code or key-switch without the Latchkey option (P4E or P112E
Option 6 off) used to Disarm the Alarm will cause a Latchkey Disarm report to be sent via the dialler. For
Domestic or Voice reporting option 1 at P188E must also be turned ON.
Option 2
Report Delinquency Alarm - If the panel has been configured for Delinquency monitoring (P67E) and an
area has not been armed for the time set at P67E, a Delinquency Alarm will be sent to the Monitoring
Station if Contact ID or 4 + 2 is set as the reporting format.
Option 3
Send Test Calls - If Contact ID or 4 + 2 formats are used for reporting alarm, the panel can also send
Automatic test calls. If this option is turned on the test calls will be sent but if test calls are not required they
can be disabled by turning this option off.
Option 4
Report Fuse Failure - The panel has two on-board thermal fuses designed to protect the 12v DC outputs
from short circuits. If this option is on and either of these fuses are open, a report will be sent to the
monitoring station if Contact ID is set as the reporting format.
Option 5
Report Output 1 or 2 Fail - The panel has two high current Outputs (O/P 1 & 2). These Outputs are normally
used to drive sirens or strobes for local alarm warning. If option 8 at location P37E is on for either O/P 1 or 2
the Output status will be monitored (eg wire to siren has been cut). If this option is on and a fault is
detected on the output, a report will be sent to the monitoring station if Contact ID is set as the reporting
format
Option 6
Report RTC (Real Time Clock) Time Changed - If the panel clock is changed and this option is turned on,
the event will be reported to the monitoring station.
Option 7
Report Keypad Buss Trouble - If any connected keypads are removed from the system they will be reported
as missing if this option is turned on.
Option 8
Report RF Interference (Jamming) Detected - If the radio receiver detects RF Interference (jamming) of the
radio frequency the panel can report this event to the monitoring station if this option is turned on.
CALL DIVERT TRIGGER EVENTS
CALL DIVERT TRIGGER EVENTS - P192E 1-2E (1 = Area A Trigger Events, 2 = Area B Trigger Events)
86
Option 1 - Divert on Arm
Option 2 - Divert on Disarm
Option 3 - Divert on Stay Mode Arm
Option 4 - Divert on Stay Mode Disarm
Option 5 - Divert on Key-switch Arm/Disarm
Option 6 - Divert on Time-zone Arm/Disarm
Option 7 - Divert on DTMF or PC Arm/Disarm
Option 8 - Divert on single button <ARM> or <STAY>
Option 1
Divert Arm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On number (P194E1E) will be dialled when the system is
Armed. The User Code must have call divert assigned at P4E option 7 for it to happen. If a User Code does
not have option 7 on at P4E the call divert number will not be dialled (used for cleaner codes and others
who should not be able to remove the call divert function).
Option 2
Divert on Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert Off number (P194E2E) will be dialled when the
system is Disarmed. The User Code must have call divert assigned at P4E option 7 for it to happen. If a User
Code does not have option 7 on at P4E the call divert number will not be dialled (used for cleaner codes and
others who should not be able to remove the call divert function).
Option 3
Divert on Stay Mode Arm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On number (P194E1E) will be dialled
when the system is Armed in Stay Mode. The User Code Must have call divert assigned at P4E option 7 for it
to happen. If a User Code does not have option 7 on at P4E the call divert number will not be dialled (used
for cleaner codes and others who should not be able to remove the call divert function).
Divert on Stay Mode Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert Off number (P194E2E) will be dialled
when the system is Stay Mode Disarmed. The User Code must have call divert assigned at P4E option 7 for it
to happen. If a User Code does not have option 7 on at P4E the call divert number will not be dialled (used
for cleaner codes and others who should not be able to remove the call divert function).
Option 4
Option 5
Divert on Key-switch Arm/Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On and Off numbers (P194E1E &
2E) will be dialled when the system is Armed or Disarmed with the key-switch.
Option 6
Divert on Time-zone Arm/Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On and Off numbers (P194E1E &
2E) will be dialled when the system is Armed or Disarmed by a Time-zone.
Option 7
Divert on DTMF or PC Arm/Disarm - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On and Off numbers (P194E1E &
2E) will be dialled when the system is Armed or Disarmed by a Remote DTMF code or by a PC connection.
Option 8
Divert on single button <ARM> or <STAY> - If this option is on then the Call-Divert On number (P194E1E)
will be dialled when the system is Armed with the <ARM> or <STAY> buttons. This option must be selected
if the Call Divert function is required and single button arming is being used.
DIVERT NUMBER DIAL OPTIONS
DIVERT NUMBER DIAL OPTIONS - P193E 1-2E (1 = Divert ON Number, 2 = Divert OFF number)
Option 1 - Spare
Option 5 - Spare
Option 2 - Spare
Option 6 - Spare
Option 3 - Blind Dial
Option 7 - Use the Dial Pre-fix Number
Option 4 - Spare
Option 8 - Spare
Option 3
Blind Dial - When the dialler makes a divert call it checks for dial tone first. If no dial tone is detected the
panel hangs up and attempts another call. The panel will do this 3 times and if dial tone is still not detected
it will make the call anyway. If blind dial is on, the panel skips the dial tone detection and dials 4 seconds
after looping the line (used where non standard or low level dial tone exists).
Option 7
Use the Dial Pre-fix Number - If the Divert number does not provide sufficient digits for dialling purposes it
is possible to program a dial pre-fix number (P175E8E). The pre-fix can be dialled before the divert number.
Turning this option on dials the pre-fix first followed by the divert number.
DIVERT NUMBER
DIVERT NUMBER - P194E 1-2E (Value 1-16 digits) (1 = Divert ON Number, 2 = Divert OFF number)
The call divert numbers are programmed at this location. They are the numbers that must be dialled to turn the divert On
or Off. Option 1 is the number to turn call divert on and Option 2 is the call divert off number.
87
4+2 PROGRAM OPTIONS
When using the 4+2 Reporting Format the two digit report code can be changed if desired at the locations below. Also
the two digit codes can include the numbers 0-9 as well the special characters B,C,D,E & F. The chart below shows how to
program the special 4+2 characters.
ARMED by USER 4+2 CODE
ARMED by USER 4+2 CODE - P16E 1-100E User Number (Value 00-FF)
DISARMED by USER 4+2 CODE
DISARMED by USER 4+2 CODE - P17E 1-100E User Number (Value 00-FF)
ZONE ALARM 4+2 CODE
ZONE ALARM 4+2 CODE - P147E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)
ZONE ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE
ZONE ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P148E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)
ZONE NEAR ALARM 4+2 CODE
ZONE NEAR ALARM 4+2 CODE - P149E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)
ZONE NEAR ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE
ZONE NEAR ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P150E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)
ZONE VERIFIED ALARM 4+2 CODE
ZONE VERIFIED ALARM 4+2 CODE - P151E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)
ZONE VERIFIED ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE
ZONE VERIFIED ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P152E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)
ZONE BYPASS 4+2 CODE
ZONE BYPASS 4+2 CODE - P155E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)
ZONE BYPASS RESTORE 4+2 CODE
ZONE BYPASS RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P156E 1-16E Zone Number (Value 00-FF)
MAINS FAIL 4+2 CODE
MAINS FAIL 4+2 CODE - P195E 1E (Value 00-FF)
MAINS FAIL RESTORE 4+2 CODE
MAINS FAIL RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 2E (Value 00-FF)
BATTERY LOW 4+2 CODE
BATTERY LOW 4+2 CODE - P195E 3E (Value 00-FF)
BATTERY LOW RESTORE 4+2 CODE
BATTERY LOW RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 4E (Value 00-FF)
SYSTEM TAMPER 4+2 CODE
SYSTEM TAMPER 4+2 CODE - P195E 5E (Value 00-FF)
SYSTEM TAMPER RESTORE 4+2 CODE
SYSTEM TAMPER RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 6E (Value 00-FF)
DTMF or PC ARM 4+2 CODE
88
DTMF or PC ARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 7E (Value 00-FF)
DTMF or PC DISARM 4+2 CODE
DTMF or PC DISARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 8E (Value 00-FF)
DURESS ALARM 4+2 CODE
LED KEYPAD
BUTTON
LED KEYPAD
INDICATION
LCD KEYPAD
BUTTON
LCD KEYPAD
CID & 4+2
INDICATIONS
LCD KEYPAD
TELEPHONE
INDICATIONS
CID & 4+2
SPECIAL
CHARACTERS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
SPECIAL FUNCTION
“BYPASS”
-
CONTROL & 0
-
DELETE #
DELETE #
DELETE #
“PANIC”
11
CONTROL & 2
B
#
“B”
“#”
“MEMORY”
12
CONTROL & 3
C
*
“C”
“*”
“CONTROL”
13
CONTROL & 4
D
-
“D”
“2.5 sec Pause”
“ARM”
14
CONTROL & 5
E
w
“E”
“Wait for 2nd Dial-tone”
“STAY”
15
CONTROL & 6
F
=
“F”
“5 sec Pause”
DURESS ALARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 9E (Value 00-FF)
AUTOMTIC TEST CALL 4+2 CODE
AUTOMATIC TEST CALL 4+2 CODE - P195E 10E (Value 00-FF)
ARMED by <ARM> BUTTON 4+2 CODE
ARMED by <ARM> BUTTON 4+2 CODE - P195E 11E (Value 00-FF)
STAY MODE ARM 4+2 CODE
STAY MODE ARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 12E (Value 00-FF)
DISARMED by <ARM> or <STAY> BUTTON 4+2
CODE
DISARMED by <ARM> or <STAY> BUTTON 4+2 CODE - P195E 13E (Value 00-FF)
ARMED by KEY-SWITCH 4+2 CODE
ARMED by KEY-SWITCH 4+2 CODE - P195E 14E (Value 00-FF)
DISARMED by KEY-SWITCH 4+2 CODE
DISARMED by KEY-SWITCH 4+2 CODE - P195E 15E (Value 00-FF)
FAIL to ARM by TIME-ZONE 4+2 CODE
FAIL to ARM by TIME-ZONE 4+2 CODE - P195E 16E (Value 00-FF)
“PANIC” ALARM 4+2 CODE
“PANIC” ALARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 17E (Value 00-FF)
“PANIC” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE
“PANIC” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 18E (Value 00-FF)
“FIRE” ALARM 4+2 CODE
“FIRE” ALARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 19E (Value 00-FF)
“FIRE” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE
“FIRE” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 20E (Value 00-FF)
89
“MEDICAL” ALARM 4+2 CODE
“MEDICAL” ALARM 4+2 CODE - P195E 21E (Value 00-FF)
“MEDICAL” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE
“MEDICAL” ALARM RESTORE 4+2 CODE - P195E 22E (Value 00-FF)
SIA ALARM REPORT CODES
The programmable SIA alarms events below are changed by programming a value from 1-14 (see chart below). For
example, to send the SIA “Emergency Alarm” code when a keypad panic is generated you must program a value of “7” at
location P197E1E.
From the chart below you can select one of 14 options that should cover most of the custom requirements. As an
example, if you required zone 10 to send a fire alarm you would program a value of 4 at address P196E10E. When you
program a particular alarm type at any of the locations below, the panel will automatically send all of the other
associated reports (if applicable) from the chart. Using the same example, if zone 10 was bypassed and the SIA report
code was set to type 4, the panel will send an “FB” event code to indicate that it is a fire zone bypass instead of the default
burglar alarm bypass (BB).
ZONE ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES
ZONE ALARM SIA REPORTING CODE - P196E 1-16E (Value from 1-14 taken from the chart below)
“PANIC” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES
“PANIC” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODE - P197E 1E (Value from 1-14 taken from the chart below)
“FIRE” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES
“FIRE” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODE - P197E 2E (Value from 1-14 taken from the chart below)
“MEDICAL” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODES
“MEDICAL” ALARM SIA REPORTING CODE - P197E 3E (Value from 1-14 taken from the chart below)
PANEL DIAGNOSTIC & DEFAULTS OPTIONS
PANEL SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER
PANEL SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER - P200E 1E
This location will display the software version of the panel.
KEYPAD ADDRESS NUMBER
KEYPAD ADDRESS NUMBER - P200E 2E
This location will display the keypad number of the keypad currently in program mode.
AREAS ASSIGNED to the KEYPAD
AREAS ASSIGNED to the KEYPAD - P200E 3E
This location will display the Areas assigned to the keypad currently in program mode.
DISPLAY TIME-ZONES CURRENTLY ACTIVE
DISPLAY TIME-ZONES CURRENTLY ACTIVE - P200E 4E
This location will display which of the 8 Time-zones are currently on.
DISPLAY BATTERY VOLTAGE
DISPLAY BATTERY VOLTAGE - P200E 5E
This location will display the system battery voltage measured by the panel.
90
WALK TEST MODE
WALK-TEST MODE - P200E 6E
This address is used to start walk-test mode while in installer or client program mode. By pressing P200E6E at the
keypad, the keypad buzzer will beep at 1 second intervals to indicate walk-test mode is active. If a siren is connected to
an Output and that output has option 1 turned on at location P36E the siren will give a 1 second beep every time a zone
is triggered while walk-test mode is active. By walking past all of the detectors connected to the system and activating
them, the associated zone will latch up at the keypad to allow verification that all zones are working properly. By
pressing the <Program> or <Enter> button, walk-test mode will be terminated and the panel will leave program mode.
The results of the walk-test will be saved in the memory event buffer and can be viewed by accessing memory display
mode to verify which detectors were triggered during walk-test mode. If Output 1 or 2 are used for the Audible walk-test
indication and a horn speaker is connected to the output (see P37E1 or 2E option 1), the siren on the output will give a
single tone for the chirp instead of the swept tone used for alarms.
WRITE TO EEPROM (DTU) BOARD
WRITE to EEPROM[DTU] BOARD - P200E 7E
This location is used to copy the panels program configuration to an external EEPROM memory card (DTU-Data Transfer
Unit) which can be plugged into the expansion socket on the control board. The write protect link on the DTU board
must be ON for the data to be transferred.
READ FROM EEPROM (DTU) BOARD
READ from EEPROM[DTU] BOARD - P200E 8E
This location is used to return the panels program configuration from an external EEPROM memory card (DTU-Data
Transfer Unit) which can be plugged into the expansion socket on the control board.
DEFAULT CODES & TELEPHONE NUMBERS
DEFAULT CODES & TELEPHONE NUMBER - P200E 9E
This location is used to return the panels User and Installer Codes plus the Telephone Numbers & Account Codes to the
default settings.
CHART FOR THE PROGRAMMABLE SIA EVENT CODES
Event
Description
Program
Number
Alarm
Restore
Bypass
UnBypass
Trouble
Trouble
Restore
Near
Alarm
Verified
Alarm
Burglary
1
BA
BH
BB
BU
BT
BJ
BA
BV
Un-typed Alarm
2
UA
UH
UB
UU
UT
UJ
-
-
Hold-up
3
HA
HH
HB
HU
HT
HJ
-
-
Fire
4
FA
FH
FB
FU
FT
FJ
FA
FM
Medical
5
MA
MH
MB
MU
MT
MJ
-
-
Panic
6
PA
PH
PB
PU
PT
PJ
-
-
Emergency
7
QA
QH
QB
QU
QT
QJ
-
-
Gas
8
GA
GH
GB
GU
GT
GJ
-
-
Sprinkler
9
SA
SH
SB
SU
ST
SJ
-
-
Water
10
WA
WH
WB
WU
WT
WJ
-
-
Heat
11
KA
KH
KB
KU
KT
KJ
-
-
Freeze
12
ZA
ZH
ZB
ZU
ZT
ZJ
-
-
Equipment
13
IA
IR
-
-
-
-
-
-
Equip. Tamper
14
TA
TH
TB
TU
TT
TJ
-
-
91
DEFAULT ALL PROGRAMMING TO FACTORY
SETTINGS
DEFAULT ALL PROGRAMMING TO FACTORY SETTINGS - P200E 10E
This location is used to return the panels User and Installer Codes plus the Telephone Numbers & Account Codes to the
default settings.
CLEAR ALARM MEMORY BUFFER
CLEAR ALARM MEMORY BUFFER - P200E 11E
This location is used to clear ALL of the events stored on memory.
INITIATE A CALL to the CALL-BACK NUMBER
INITIATE A CALL to the CALL-BACK NUMBER - P200E 12E
This location is used to force a call to the call-back number..
READ RSSI from PENDANTS and WIRELESS ZONES
READ RSSI from PENDANTS and ZONES - P200E 14E
This location is used to display the RSSI (received signal strength) from Pendants and Wireless Zones that are loaded into
the panel. The feature was added at panel version V906.5 and requires the Arrowhead RX-16 MF receiver to be
connected to the panel for RSSI data to be available. The RSSI reading will be shown along with the user or zone number
that was received. The feature can only be displayed on LCD keypads with a software version of V208.5 and higher or the
Icon LCD keypad
92
‘S series’
PROGRAM
SUMMARY GUIDE
The following program summary is an abbreviated version of all the panel program addresses. This is intended as a quick
guide to finding a program address. In many address locations, there is a main address (e.g. “P1E”), then a sub address
(e.g. P1E “1E”). You must enter in the main address number, followed by the sub address, then you can enter the actual
data. The program addresses are in numerical order with page references beside them so you can get more detailed
information if required. This Summary is split into 11 headings. These are;
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Users Programming
Miscellaneous Panel & Clock Settings
Outputs
Areas
Keypads
Key-Switches
Zones
Page 38
Page 44
Page 49
Page 52
Page 58
Page 66
Page 67
8) Time Zones
9) Dialler
10) Telephone Numbers
11) Miscellaneous 4+2 Program Options
12) SIA Report Codes 13) Panel Diagnostic & Default Options
USERS
P1E
1-100E
Page 77
Page 78
Page 82
Page 88
Page 90
Page 90
Programming User Codes
User Code 1-100 - Default for User Code # 1 (P1E1E) = 1234 Codes can be 1-6 or 4-6 digits.
(where 1E = User Code #1 to 100E = User Code #100)
Page 38
NOTE: The 100 Users can be keypad Code, Radio or Access key Users. They can be mixed but the Maximum is 100 Users.
The User type MUST be set to “0” (P2E User# E) for a code to be entered at the above address.
User Type (Code/Radio/Access Tag-Card)
P2E
1-100E
User # 1-100 Type (Default = 0)
P3E
1-100E
User # 1-100 Area (Default = 1)
P4E
1-100E
P5E
1-100E
0 = Keypad Code User {PIN}
1 = Radio User (Users 21-100 only)
2 = Access Tag/Card User
3 = Both Code and Access Tag/Card User {Tag + PIN)
4 = Either Code or Access Tag/Card User {Tag or PIN}
1 = Assigned to Area “A”
2 = Assigned to Area “B”
Page 38
User Area Assignment
Page 39
User Code Access Options
Page 39
Users 1-100 Access Options (Default 1-4)
1 = Code can Arm Area
2 = Code can arm Stay Mode
3 = Code can Disarm Area
4 = Code can disarm Stay Mode
5 = Code is a Security Guard Code
6 = Code will Arm Latchkey Mode
7 = Call Divert Code
8 = Can View Event Memory
Users 1-100 Privileges
1 = User can Change their Code
Page 40
2 = User can Change All Codes
3 = User can Allow Access to Installer Mode/Edit all Codes
4 = User can Change Telephone Numbers
5 = User can Change the Clock
6 = User can Change DTMF Command Codes
7 = User can Learn New Radio Devices
8 = User can Force a Download to Callback Number
(Default = 1,3,4)
User Code Privileges
(Default User 1 = 2,3,4,5,6,7,8)
(Default User 2-100 = All Off)
Radio User Type
P7E
21-100E Radio User 21-100 Type
0 = General Pendant Type
1 = Crow Freelink Pendant
21 = Ness Pendant
(Default = 0)
P8E
21-100E Radio Users 21-100 Privileges
Page 40
Radio User Privileges
1 = Pendant Can Disarm at All Times
2 = Pendant Causes Immediate Panic
3 = Pendant Causes Delayed Panic ( 1.5 Sec)
4 = Pendant only works during Entry Delay
5 = This User is a Duress Code (Users 21-100)
6 = Spare
7 = Spare
8 = Spare
(Default = 1)
93
Page 41
Time Zone Assigned to a User
P9E
1-100E
Time Zone to User # 1-100
(Default = All Off)
1 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 1
2 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 2
3 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 3
4 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 4
5 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 5
6 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 6
7 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 7
8 = User Controlled by Time Zone # 8
Page 41
1 = Can Operate at Keypad # 1
2 = Can Operate at Keypad # 2
3 = Can Operate at Keypad # 3
4 = Can Operate at Keypad # 4
5 = Can Operate at Keypad # 5
6 = Can Operate at Keypad # 6
7 = Can Operate at Keypad # 7
8 = Can Operate at Keypad # 8
Page 42
1 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 1
2 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 2
3 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 3
4 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 4
5 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 5
6 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 6
7 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 7
8 = A Radio panic will Beep at Keypad # 8
Page 42
1 = User is Mapped to Output # 1
2 = User is Mapped to Output # 2
3 = User is Mapped to Output # 3
4 = User is Mapped to Output # 4
5 = User is Mapped to Output # 5
6 = User is Mapped to Output # 6
7 = User is Mapped to Output # 7
8 = User is Mapped to Output # 8
Page 42
1 = User Can Turn on Output # 1
2 = User Can Turn on Output # 2
3 = User Can Turn on Output # 3
4 = User Can Turn on Output # 4
5 = User Can Turn on Output # 5
6 = User Can Turn on Output # 6
7 = User Can Turn on Output # 7
8 = User Can Turn on Output # 8
Page 42
1 = User Can Turn off Output # 1
2 = User Can Turn off Output # 2
3 = User Can Turn off Output # 3
4 = User Can Turn off Output # 4
5 = User Can Turn off Output # 5
6 = User Can Turn off Output # 6
7 = User Can Turn off Output # 7
8 = User Can Turn off Output # 8
Page 43
1 = Radio panic to Output # 1
2 = Radio panic to Output # 2
3 = Radio panic to Output # 3
4 = Radio panic to Output # 4
5 = Radio panic to Output # 5
6 = Radio panic to Output # 6
7 = Radio panic to Output # 7
8 = Radio panic to Output # 8
Page 43
User to Keypad Assignment
P10E
1-100E
User # 1-100 Keypad Assignment
(Default = All On)
Radio Pendant Panic Beeps to Keypad
P11E
21-100E Radio # 21-100 Panic Beep to Keypad
(Default = All On)
Users to Output Mask
P12E
1-100E
User # 1-100 to Output Mask
(Default = 4 For Button 3 For Users
23, 27, 31, 35, 39, 43, 47, 51, 55, 59,
63, 67, 71, 75, 79, 83, 87, 91, 95, 99)
User can Turn an Output On
P13E
1-100E
User # 1-100 Can Turn On an Output
(Default = 4 For Button 3 For Users
23, 27, 31, 35, 39, 43, 47, 51, 55, 59,
63, 67, 71, 75, 79, 83, 87, 91, 95, 99)
User can Turn an Output Off
P14E
1-100E
User # 1-100 Can Turn Off an Output
(Default = All Off)
Radio Pendant Panic Alarm to an Output
P15E
21-100E Radio # 21-100 Panic Alarm to an O/P
(Default = 1,2)
Armed by User # 4+2 Reporting Code
Page 88
P16E
1-100E
4+2 Arm Code for Users 1-100
P17E
1-100E
4+2 Disarm Code for Users 1-100
P18E
21-100E Learn Radio Pendant Codes for Users 21-100
Disarmed by User # 4+2 Reporting Code
Page 88
Learn Radio Pendant Codes
94
Page 43
(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 1)
P19E
Delete a Specific Radio Pendant Code
Page 43
21-100E Delete a Specific Radio Pendant Code for Users 21-100
(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 1)
Find Radio Pendant memory Location
P20E
0E
Page 44
Enter this address then operate the Radio Pendant to find its user #
(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 1). Only press 0E when using LED Keypad.
Learn Access Tag/Card Codes
P21E
1-100E
(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 2, 3 or 4)
P22E
1-100E
Delete a Specific Access Tag/Card Code
0E
Page 44
Delete a Specific Access Tag/Card Code for Users 1-100
(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 2, 3 or 4)
P23E
Page 44
Learn Access Tag/Card Codes for Users 1-100
Find an Access Tag/Card memory Location
Page 44
Enter this address then operate the Access Tag/Card to find its user #
(applies if the User Type, P2E, is set to 2, 3 or 4). Only press 0E when using LED Keypad.
MISCELLANEOUS PANEL & CLOCK SETTINGS
Installer Code
Page 44
P25E
1E
Installer Code - ( Default = 000000)
P25E
2E
Duress Digit - Value 1-9 (Default = 0 Duress Function Disabled)
P25E
3E
Dial Report Delay - Value 0-255 seconds (Default = 0)
P25E
4E
Radio Detector Supervised Timer - 0-9999 Minutes (Default = 60 Minutes)
P25E
5E
Two Trigger Timer - Value 0-255 Seconds (Default = 60 Sec)
P25E
6E
Mains Fail Reporting Delay - Value 0-9999 Seconds (Default = 600 Sec)
P25E
7E
Receiver Fail Delay - Value 0-9999 Seconds (Default = 0 Sec-Disabled)
Page 45
P25E
8E
Upload/Download Site Code Number - Up to 8 Characters (Default = None)
Page 45
P25E
9E
Temporary Output Disable - Output 1-8
Page 46
P25E
10E
Misc. Panel Options
Miscellaneous Options
(Default = 1, 2, 6)
1 = Panel Tamper is 2k2 EOL
2 = Direct access to program mode for the installer code.
3 = Disable Mains Fail Test
4 = Listen-in to O/P # 1 Low Volume
5 = Receiver Fail/RF Jammed Lockout
6 = Send output information to keypad bus
7 = Cannot arm if the system battery is low
8 = Installer Lockout
Duress Digit
Page 45
Dial Report Delay
Page 45
Radio Detector Supervised Timer
Page 45
Two Trigger Timer
Page 45
Mains Fail Reporting Delay
Page 45
Receiver Fail Delay
Upload/Download Site Code Number
Temporary Output Disable
Miscellaneous Panel Options
P25E
11E
Installer Options
P25E
12E
User Options (NOTE: This Option can ONLY be accessed from Client Mode)
(Default = All Off)
(Default = All Off)
Page 46
Installer Options
1 = Entry to installer mode resets confirmed alarms
2 = Entry to installer mode resets tamper alarms
3 = Entry to installer mode resets low battery alarms
4 = Entry to installer mode resets supervisory alarms
5 = Cannot Arm if there is a keypad Fault
6 = Cannot Arm if there is a Telephone Line Failure or Comms Fault
7 = 10 Incorrect Code Attempts locks out the keypad for 90 Seconds
8 = User Codes Must be 4-6 digits long
1 = Hide User Codes from Installer
95
Page 47
User Options
Page 47
P25E
13E
Page 48
Misc. User Options
Miscellaneous User Options
(Default = )
1 = Code Required to View Memory
2 = Cancel Handover Zone Function in Stay Mode
3 = Output Control from Keypad is Disabled when Armed
4 = Keypad Codes are Disabled During Entry Delay
5 = No Keypad Indications while Armed
6 = Monitored KP Buss Output Board
7 = Enable Keypad Tamper Switch Alarms
8 = Limit Events & Dialler to 3 of any one type
Setting Real Time Clock
P26E
P26E
P26E
P26E
1E
2E
3E
4E
Real Time Hour/Minute - Value 0-2359
Page 48
Real Time Day of Week - Value 1-7 (1=Sunday, 2=Monday ,etc)
Real Time Date/Month/Year - Value DDMMYY (eg 020904 = 2nd Sept 2004)
Daylight Saving is Active (If LED #1 is On, Daylight Saving is currently active) Turn this bit ON if you are in Daylight
Saving Time when the panel is installed.
P27E
P28E
P29E
1E
2E
1E
2E
1E
2E
Daylight Saving settings
Daylight Saving Start Sunday - Value 0-5 - Default = 1 (0 = DLS disabled, 5 = last Sunday of Month)
Daylight Saving End Sunday - Value 0-5 - Default = 1 (0 = DLS disabled, 5 = last Sunday of Month)
Daylight Saving Start Month - Value 1-12 - Default = 10
Daylight Saving End Month - Value 1-12 - Default = 4
Daylight Saving Start Hour - Value 0-23 - Default = 2
Daylight Saving End Hour - Value 0-23 - Default = 2
OUTPUT
P34E
1-8E
Options “A” for Outputs 1-8
(Default = All Off)
Page 48
Programming Output Options “A”
1 = Invert Output
2 = Flash Output
3 = Single Pulse to Output
4 = Lockout Output
5 = DTMF Remote Control can operate Output
6 = User Can operate this Output
7 = “Control” button Can Operate Output
8 = Chime Alarms will Flash this Output (linked to Pulse Timer)
Page 49
1 = Mains Fail to Output (Operates when P25E6E time expires)
2 = Fuse Failure to Output
3 = Battery Low to output
4 = Telephone Line Failure to Output
5 = Supervised Radio Signal Failure
6 = Sensor-Watch Alarm
7 = System Tamper to Output
8 = Receiver Fail
Page 50
1 = Walk Test Pulse to Output
2 = Pulse Output every 5 seconds when Disarmed
3 = Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following Arming
4 = Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following a Zone Alarm
5 = Spare
6 = Spare
7 = Spare
8 = Spare
Page 50
Programming Output Options “B”
P35E
1-8E
Options “B” for Outputs 1-8
(Default O/P’s 1&2 = 7)
(Default O/P’s 3-8 = All Off)
Programming Output Options “C”
P36E
1-8E
Options “C” for Outputs 1-8
(Default = 1)
Programming Output Options “D”
P37E
1-8E
Options “D” for Outputs 1-8
(Default = All Off)
1 = Siren Driver to Output (requires a horn speaker, outputs 1&2)
Page 50
2 = Output Reset-Chime timers are in minutes (off for seconds-1/10th seconds)
3 = Output ‘silenced’ for 10 seconds on key-press if alarm
4 = Turn Output OFF during Two Way Voice Mode
5 = Spare
6 = Spare
7 = Spare
8 = Monitored Output (can tell if siren cable is cut, outputs 1&2 only)
Output ON Delay Time
P38E
1-8E
Output 1-8 ON Delay Time - 0-9999 Seconds (Default = 0 Sec)
P39E
1-8E
Output 1-8 Pulse Time - 0-255;1/10th Sec increments (Default =2 which is 0.2 sec)
96
Page 51
Output Pulse Time
Page 51
Output Reset Time
P40E
1-8E
Output 1-8 Reset Time - 0-9999 Seconds (Default = O/P 1=240, O/P 2=0, O/P 3=0, O/P 4=1)
(if option 2 at P37E is on the reset time is in minutes)
Page 51
Output Chime Mode Time
Page 51
P41E
1-8E
Output 1-8 Chime Timer - 0-255;1/10th Sec increments (Default =10 which is 1 sec)
P42E
1-8E
Start message Number for Outputs 1-8 “Command Control” - 0-99 (Default = 0)
Page 52
P43E
1-8E
Un-map Outputs 1-8 (remove ALL Defaults from an Output)
Page 52
P44E
1-8E
Time-zones that will control Outputs 1-8 - Value = Time-zone 1-8 (Default = All Off)
Page 52
Start of Output “Command Control” Status Messages
Un-Map an Output
Assigning a Time-zone to an Output
AREAS
Area “A” & “B” Options A
P45E
1-2E
Area A&B Options A
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
1 = Arm Button Required Before Code to Set
2 = Stay Button Required Before Code to Set Stay Mode
3 = Code required to Set
4 = Code Required to Bypass Zones
5 = Spare
6 = Send Arm at the end of the Exit Delay
7 = Can Arm only if All Zones are Sealed (Ready)
8 = Can Arm Stay Mode only if All Zones are Sealed (Ready)
Page 52
1 = Near and Confirmed Alarm reporting for All zones in this Area (CID only)
2 = Area will arm at end of time-zone
3 = Area will disarm at beginning of time-zone
4 = Assign Chirps to Access tags
5 = Spare
6 = Spare
7 = Cannot Arm if Zone Unsealed at end of Exit Delay
8 = Spare
Page 53
Area “A” & “B” Options B
P46E
1-2E
Area A&B Options B
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
Area “A” & “B” Arm Indication to Output
P47E
1-2E
Area A&B Arm Indication to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
P48E
1-2E
P49E
1-2E
1-2E
Page 54
Area “A” & “B” Disarm Indication to Output
Area A&B Disarm Indication to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
P50E
Area “A” & “B” Stay Arm Indication to Output
Area A&B Stay Arm Indication to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
Page 53
Page 54
Area “A” & “B” Pendant (or Access Tag) Arm Chirp to Output
Area A&B Arm Chirp to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(One chirp to the output for arm)
Page 54
(1=Area “A”) (Default = 2)
(2=Area “B”)
Area “A” & “B” Pendant (or Access Tag) Stay Arm Chirp to Output
P51E
Area A&B Stay Arm Chirp to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(One chirp to the output for stay arm)
1-2E
(2=Area “B”)
P52E
P53E
Area “A” & “B” Pendant (or Access Tag) Disarm Chirp to Output
Area A&B Disarm Chirp to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = 2)
(Two chirps to the output for disarm)
1-2E
(2=Area “B”)
Page 54
Page 54
Area “A” & “B” Pendant Stay (or Access Tag) Disarm Chirp to Output
Area A&B Stay Disarm Chirp to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(Two chirps to the output for disarm)
1-2E
(2=Area “B”)
97
Page 54
Area “A” & “B” Arm Pulse to Output
P54E
1-2E
Area A&B Arm Pulse to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
P55E
1-2E
Area “A” & “B” Stay Arm Pulse to Output
Area A&B Stay Arm Pulse to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
P56E
1-2E
1-2E
1-2E
Page 55
Area “A” & “B” Stay Disarm Pulse to Output
Area A&B Stay Disarm Pulse to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
P58E
Page 55
Area “A” & “B” Disarm Pulse to Output
Area A&B Disarm Pulse to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
P57E
Page 55
Page 56
Area “A” & “B” Armed Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad
Area A&B Armed Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad - Value 1-8 (for Keypads 1-8)
Page 56
(1=Area “A”) (Default, Area A = All On, Area B = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
Area “A” & “B” Stay Mode Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad
P59E
P60E
P61E
1-2E
Area A&B Stay Exit Delay Beeps to Keypad - Value 1-8 (for Keypads 1-8)
1-2E
Area A&B Exit Delay Time - Value 0-255 seconds
1-2E
Area A&B Stay Exit Delay Time - Value 0-255 seconds
(1=Area “A”) (Default Area A = All On, Area B = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
P62E
Area “A” & “B” Armed Exit Delay Time
(1=Area “A”) (Default = 30 Seconds for Areas A&B)
(2=Area “B”)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = 30 Seconds for Areas A&B)
(2=Area “B”)
1-2E
Page 56
Page 56
Area “A” & “B” Stay Armed Exit Delay Time
Page 56
Area “A” & “B” Monitoring Account Code Number
Area A&B Account Code - Value 0000-FFFF
Page 56
(1=Area “A”) (Default = 0000 for Areas A&B)
(2=Area “B”)
Area “A” & “B” Remote “Command Control” Code Number
P63E
1-2E
Area A&B Command Control code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999)
Page 56
(1=Area “A”) (Default = 0 for Areas A&B)
(2=Area “B”)
Start Message Number for Areas “A” & “B” “Command Control”
P64E
1-2E
Start Message for Areas A&B Command Control - Value 0-99
(1=Area “A”) (Default = 0 for Areas A&B)
(2=Area “B”)
P65E
1-2E
P66E
1-2E
Area “A” & “B” Armed Mode Exit Beeps to Output
Area A&B Armed Exit Beeps to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
1-2E
P68E
1-2E
Page 57
Area “A” & “B” Delinquency Delay
Area A&B Delinquency Delay - value 0-99 Days, (0 = Off)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = 0 for areas A&B)
(2=Area “B”)
Page 57
Area “A” & “B” Stay Mode Exit Beeps to Output
Area A&B Stay Exit Beeps to Output - Value 1-8 (for Outputs 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
P67E
Page 57
Page 57
Area “A” & “B” Auto Arm/Disarm Time-zones
Area A&B Auto Arm/Disarm Time-zones - Value 1-8 (for Time-zones 1-8)
(1=Area “A”) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area “B”)
98
Page 58
KEYPADS
P71E
1-8E
Keypads Assigned To Areas
(Default = 1,2)
P72E
1-8E
P73E
1-8E
Keypad Area Assignment
Page 58
1 = Area “A”
2 = Area “B”
Keypad Button Options
Keypad Button Options
1 = <CHIME> or <CONTROL><PROGRAM> Button Enabled
2 = <BYPASS> Button Enabled
3 = <PANIC> Button Enabled
4 = Delayed panic on <PANIC> Button
5 = <1> + <3> or <CONTROL> + <CHIME> Panic Alarm Enabled
6 = <4> + <6> or <A> + <B> Fire Alarm Enabled
7 = <7> + <9> or <B> + <CHIME> Medical Alarm Enabled
8 = Stay Armed Beep to Keypad
Page 58
Keypad Beep/LED Options
1 = Mains Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer
2 = Fuse Failure Beeps Keypad Buzzer
3 = Battery Low Beeps Keypad Buzzer
4 = Telephone Line Failure Beeps Keypad Buzzer
5 = System Tamper Alarm Beeps Keypad Buzzer
6 = Receiver Fail Beeps Keypad Buzzer
7 = Turn Off Keypad LED’s when Armed
8 = Turn Off Keypad & Backlight LED’s on Mains Failure
Page 59
1 = “ARM” Button assigned to Area “A”
2 = “ARM” Button assigned to Area “B”
Page 60
1 = “ARM” Button can Arm
2 = “ARM” Button can Stay Mode Arm
3 = “ARM” Button can Disarm at All Times
4 = “ARM” Button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times
5 = “ARM” Button can Reset Alarms
6 = “ARM” Button can Arm Latchkey Mode
7 = “ARM” Button can Disarm During Exit Delay
8 = “ARM” Button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay
Page 60
1 = “STAY” Button assigned to Area “A”
2 = “STAY” Button assigned to Area “B”
Page 61
1 = “STAY” Button can Arm
2 = “STAY” Button can Stay Mode Arm
3 = “STAY” Button can Disarm at All Times
4 = “STAY” Button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times
5 = “STAY” Button can Reset Alarms
6 = “STAY” Button can Arm Latchkey Mode
7 = “STAY” Button can Disarm During Exit Delay
8 = “STAY” Button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay
Page 61
1 = “A” Button assigned to Area “A”
2 = “A” Button assigned to Area “B”
Page 61
1 = “A” Button can Arm
2 = “A” Button can Stay Mode Arm
3 = “A” Button can Disarm at All Times
4 = “A” Button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times
5 = “A” Button can Reset Alarms
6 = “A” Button can Arm Latchkey Mode
7 = “A” Button can Disarm During Exit Delay
8 = “A” Button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay
Page 62
1 = “B” Button assigned to Area “A”
2 = “B” Button assigned to Area “B”
Page 62
1 = “B” Button can Arm
2 = “B” Button can Stay Mode Arm
3 = “B” Button can Disarm at All Times
4 = “B” Button can Disarm Stay Mode at All Times
5 = “B” Button can Reset Alarms
6 = “B” Button can Arm Latchkey Mode
7 = “B” Button can Disarm During Exit Delay
Page 63
(Default = All 1,2,3,4,5)
Alarm Beeps & LED Control to Keypad
(Default = KPI = 1,2,3,5
KP2-8 = 5)
Keypad “ARM” Button Area Assignment
P74E
1-8E
Keypad “ARM” Button Area
(Default = 1)
P75E
1-8E
Keypad “ARM” Button Area Options
Keypad “ARM” Button Opts.
(Default = 1,7)
Keypad “STAY” Button Area Assignment
P76E
1-8E
Keypad “STAY” Button Area
(Default = 1)
P77E
1-8E
Keypad “STAY” Button Area Options
Keypad “STAY” Button Opts.
(Default K/P 1,2,3,4,6,7,8 = 2,8)
(Default K/P 5 = 2,4)
Keypad “A” Button (Portrait LCD KP only) Area Assignment
P78E
1-8E
Keypad “A” Button Area
(Default = 1)
P79E
1-8E
Keypad “A” Button (Portrait LCD KP only) Area Options
Keypad “A” Button Opts.
(Default = 1,7)
Keypad “B” Button (Portrait LCD KP only) Area Assignment
P80E
P81E
1-8E
1-8E
Keypad “B” Button Area
(Default = 2)
Keypad “B” Button (Portrait LCD KP only) Area Options
Keypad “B” Button Opts.
(Default = All Off)
99
8 = “B” Button can Disarm Stay Mode During Exit Delay
Keypad to Output Mask (for Access Control)
P82E
1-8E
Keypad to Output Mask
(Default = All Off)
Page 63
1 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 1
2 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 2
3 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 3
4 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 4
5 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 5
6 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 6
7 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 7
8 = The Keypad is linked to Output # 8
“Control” Button to Output Mask (for Access Control)
P83E
1-8E
Page 63
Keypad “Control” Button to Output Mask
(Default = All Off)
1 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 1
2 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 2
3 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 3
4 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 4
5 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 5
6 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 6
7 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 7
8 = The Keypad “Control” Button is linked to Output # 8
“Panic” Button or “1&3” Alarm to Outputs
P84E
1-8E
Page 64
Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” Alarm to Outputs
(Default = 1,2)
1 = The Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” will turn on Output # 1
2 = The Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” will turn on Output # 2
3 = The Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” will turn on Output # 3
4 = The Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” will turn on Output # 4
5 = The Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” will turn on Output # 5
6 = The Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” will turn on Output # 6
7 = The Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” will turn on Output # 7
8 = The Keypad “Panic” Button or “1&3” will turn on Output # 8
“Fire (4&6)” Alarm to Outputs
P85E
1-8E
Page 64
Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm to Outputs
(Default = 1,2)
1 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm will turn on Output # 1
2 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm will turn on Output # 2
3 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm will turn on Output # 3
4 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm will turn on Output # 4
5 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm will turn on Output # 5
6 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6)” Alarm will turn on Output # 6
7 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6) Alarm “will turn on Output # 7
8 = The Keypad “Fire (4&6) Alarm “will turn on Output # 8
“Medical (7&9)” Alarm to Outputs
P86E
1-8E
Page 64
Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm to Outputs
(Default = 1,2)
1 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will turn on Output # 1
2 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will turn on Output # 2
3 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will turn on Output # 3
4 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will turn on Output # 4
5 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will turn on Output # 5
6 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will turn on Output # 6
7 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will turn on Output # 7
8 = The Keypad “Medical (7&9)” Alarm will turn on Output # 8
“Duress” Alarm to Outputs
P87E
1-8E
Page 64
Keypad “Duress” Alarm to Outputs
(Default = All Off)
1 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will turn on Output # 1
2 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will turn on Output # 2
3 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will turn on Output # 3
4 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will turn on Output # 4
5 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will turn on Output # 5
6 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will turn on Output # 6
7 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will turn on Output # 7
8 = The Keypad “Duress” Alarm will turn on Output # 8
Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm to Outputs
P88E
1-8E
Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm to Outputs
(Default = All Off)
1 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will turn on Output # 1
2 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will turn on Output # 2
3 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will turn on Output # 3
4 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will turn on Output # 4
5 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will turn on Output # 5
6 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will turn on Output # 6
7 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will turn on Output # 7
8 = The Keypad “Tamper Switch” Alarm will turn on Output # 8
Page 64
Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm to Outputs
P89E
1-8E
Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm to Outputs
(Default = All Off)
1 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 1
100
Page 65
2 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 2
3 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 3
4 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 4
5 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 5
6 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 6
7 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 7
8 = The Keypad “Wrong Code” Alarm will turn on Output # 8
Manually Operated Panic Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P90E
1-8E
Page 65
Panic Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
1=A
2=A
3=A
4=A
5=A
6=A
7=A
8=A
Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 1
Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 2
Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 3
Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 4
Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 5
Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 6
Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 7
Panic Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 8
1=A
2=A
3=A
4=A
5=A
6=A
7=A
8=A
Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 1
Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 2
Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 3
Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 4
Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 5
Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 6
Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 7
Fire Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 8
Manually Operated Fire Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P91E
1-8E
P92E
1-8E
Fire Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
Page 65
Manually Operated Medical Alarm Beeps to Keypads
Page 65
Medical Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
1=A
2=A
3=A
4=A
5=A
6=A
7=A
8=A
Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 1
Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 2
Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 3
Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 4
Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 5
Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 6
Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 7
Medical Alarm at the selected keypad will Beep KP # 8
Wrong Code or Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P93E
1-8E
Wrong Code or Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
P94E
1-8E
1=A
2=A
3=A
4=A
5=A
6=A
7=A
8=A
Chime Alarm Beep Time at a Keypad
The Time the Chime Alarm will sound at Each Keypad - Value =0-255 1/10th sec
(Default = 20 which is 2 Seconds)
P98E
1-8E
Page 65
Proximity Reader LED to Output Mapping
Proximity Reader LED to Output Mapping
(Default = None)
Page 65
Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 1
Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 2
Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 3
Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 4
Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 5
Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 6
Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 7
Wrong Code or KP Tamper Alarm at Keypad 1-8 will Beep KP # 8
Page 66
1 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 1
2 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 2
3 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 3
4 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 4
5 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 5
6 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 6
7 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 7
8 = Proximity Reader 1-8 LED will follow the state of Output # 8
Learn Proximity Reader Keypad Address Number
P99E
1-8E
Learn Proximity Reader Keypad Address Number - Value = Keypad Address 1-8
101
Page 66
KEY SWITCHES
P111E
1-2E
K/S 1 & 2 assigned to Areas A or B -
(1 = K/S # 1) (Default K/S # 1 = 1)
(2 = K/S # 2) (Default K/S # 2 = 2)
P112E
1-2E
Key-switch Area Assignment
1 = Assigned to Area “A”
2 = Assigned to Area “B”
Page 66
Key-switch Access & Operational Options
K/S 1 & 2 Access & Operational Options
(1 = K/S # 1) (Default = All Off)
(2 = K/S # 2)
1 = K/S can Arm Area
Page 67
2 = K/S can arm Stay Mode
3 = K/S can Disarm Area
4 = K/S can disarm Stay Mode
5 = K/S has Security Guard Options
6 = K/S will Arm Latchkey Mode
7 = Key-switch is N/O (If turned off the K/S is N/C)
8 = Key-switch is Momentary (If turned off the K/S is Latching)
ZONES
Programming Zones to Areas
P121E
1-16E
Assigning Zones to Areas A or B
1 = Assigned to Area “A”
2 = Assigned to Area “B”
Page 67
P122E
1-16E
Programming Zone Options A
1 = Zone is Active
2 = Zone is N/O (Off = N/C)
3 = Spare
4 = Keypad Zone
5 = Zone is a Radio Zone
6 = Zone is a Stay Mode Zone
7 = Zone can be Manually Bypassed
8 = Zone can be Auto-Bypassed
Page 67
1 = Zone is a Handover Zone
2 = Zone is a Two Trigger Zone
3 = Zone is a 24 Hour Zone
4 = Zone is a 24 Hour Auto-reset Zone
5 = Zone is a 24 Hour Fire Zone
6 = Spare
7 = Zone is a Chime Zone
8 = Zone is a Permanent Chime Zone
Page 68
1 = Can Arm if Zone is not Ready
2 = Will Send Multiple Reports via Dialler
3 = Sensor-Watch Zone
4 = Zone is on Soak Test
5 = Zone will report to Area B Account Number
6 = Zone will Not Report 24 hour Alarms via Dialler
7 = Pulse Output on Kiss-off Following an alarm
8 = Exit Terminator
Page 69
0 = Short Circuit
1 = 1k
2 = 1k5
3 = 2k2
4 = 3k3
5 = 3k9
6 = 4k7
7 = 5k6
8 = 6k8
9 = 10k
10 = 12k
11 = 22k
12 = 2k2 / 4k7
13 = 3k3 / 6k8
14 = 2k2 / 4k7 / 8k2
15 = 4k7 / 8k2
Page 70
(Default = 1)
Programming Zone Options A
(Default Zone 1-4 = 1,6,7,8)
(Default Zone 5-8 = 1,7,8)
(Default Zone 9-16 = 7,8)
Programming Zone Options B
P123E
1-16E
Programming Zone Options B
(Default Zone 2, 3 = 1
Programming Zone Options C
P124E
1-16E
Programming Zone Options C
(Default = 2)
Programming Zone EOL (End-of-line) Options
P125E
1-8E
Programming Zone EOL Options
(Default = 3)
Programming Zone Response
P126E
1-8E
1 to 8 Vibration mode
Page 70
(Zone EOL-P125E, for Vibration Mode MUST be type 3 only )
1 = highest and 8 is lowest sensitivity level.
Programming Zone Response
(Default = 15)
102
9 to 26 Normal zone mode
Response time = approx 200ms –1sec
Programming the Radio Zone Detector Type
P127E
1-16E
Programming the Radio Zone Type from the List - Value = 1-35
(Default = 3)
Page 71
0 = Generic
1 = Crow Merlin PIR (supervised signal ignored)
2 = Crow Merlin PIR (supervised signal active)
3 = Freelink with checksum (supervised signal active)
4 = Freelink with checksum (non-supervised)
5 = Crow AE Series Battery low
6 = Crow AE Radio Reed Switch
11 = Ness Devices battery Low
12 = Ness Radio Reed Switch
31 = Visonic K900 Radio PIR
32 = Visonic Powercode (supervised signal ignored)
33 = Visonic Powercode (supervised signal active)
34 = Siemens (supervised signal ignored)
35 = Siemens (supervised signal active)
Armed Zone Alarms to Outputs
P128E
1-16E
Page 72
Armed Zone Alarms to Output
(Default = 1,2)
1 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 1
2 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 2
3 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 3
4 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 4
5 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 5
6 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 6
7 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 7
8 = A Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 8
Armed Stay Mode Zone Alarms to Outputs
P129E
1-16E
Page 72
Armed Stay Mode Zone Alarms to Output
(Default = 2)
1 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 1
2 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 2
3 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 3
4 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 4
5 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 5
6 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 6
7 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 7
8 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 8
24 Hour Zone Alarms to Outputs
P130E
1-16E
Page 72
24 Hour Zone Alarms to Output
(Default = All Off)
1 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 1
2 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 2
3 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 3
4 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 4
5 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 5
6 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 6
7 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 7
8 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 8
Chime Zone Alarms to Outputs
P131E
1-16E
(Default = All Off)
P132E
1-16E
1-16E
1=A
2=A
3=A
4=A
5=A
6=A
7=A
8=A
Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 1
Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 2
Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 3
Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 4
Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 5
Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 6
Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 7
Chime Zone Alarm will Turn On Output # 8
1=A
2=A
3=A
4=A
5=A
6=A
7=A
8=A
Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 1
Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 2
Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 3
Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 4
Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 5
Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 6
Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 7
Zone Tamper Alarm will Turn On Output # 8
Zone Tamper Alarms to Outputs
Page 73
Zone Tamper Alarms to Output
(Default = 1,2)
P134E
Page 72
Chime Zone Alarms to Output
Armed Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads
Page 73
Armed Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
1 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #1
2 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #2
3 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #3
4 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #4
103
5 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #5
6 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #6
7 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #7
8 = An Armed Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #8
Stay Mode Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P135E
1-16E
Page 73
Stay Mode Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
1 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #1
2 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #2
3 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #3
4 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #4
5 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #5
6 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #6
7 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #7
8 = A Stay Mode Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #8
24 Hour Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P136E
1-16E
24 Hour Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P137E
1-16E
Chime Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
1 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #1
2 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #2
3 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #3
4 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #4
5 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #5
6 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #6
7 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #7
8 = A 24 Hour Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #8
Page 73
Chime Zone Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
Page 73
1 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #1
2 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #2
3 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #3
4 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #4
5 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #5
6 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #6
7 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #7
8 = A Chime Zone Alarm will Beep Keypad #8
Zone Tamper Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P139E
1-16E
Page 74
Zone Tamper Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All On)
1 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #1
2 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #2
3 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #3
4 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #4
5 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #5
6 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #6
7 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #7
8 = A Zone Tamper Alarm will Beep Keypad #8
Radio Supervise Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P140E
1-16E
Page 74
Radio Supervise Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default Zones 1-16 = KP1 Only
1 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #1
2 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #2
3 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #3
4 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #4
5 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #5
6 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #6
7 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #7
8 = A Radio Supervise Alarm will Beep Keypad #8
Zone Inactivity Alarm Beeps to Keypads
P141E
1-16E
Page 74
Zone Inactivity Alarm Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All Off)
1 = A Zone Inactivity Alarm will Beep Keypad #1
2 = A Zone Inactivity Alarm will Beep Keypad #2
3 = A Zone Inactivity Alarm will Beep Keypad #3
4 = A Zone Inactivity Alarm will Beep Keypad #4
5 = A Zone Inactivity Alarm will Beep Keypad #5
6 = A Zone Inactivity Alarm will Beep Keypad #6
7 = A Zone Inactivity Alarm will Beep Keypad #7
8 = A Zone Inactivity Alarm will Beep Keypad #8
Armed Zone Entry Delay Beeps to Keypads
P142E
1-16E
Armed Zone Entry Delay Beeps to Keypads
(Default = All Keypads)
1 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #1
2 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #2
3 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #3
4 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #4
5 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #5
6 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #6
7 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #7
104
Page 74
8 = Armed Zone Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #8
Stay Mode Entry Delay Beeps to Keypads
P143E
1-16E
Page 74
Stay Mode Entry Delay Beeps to Keypads
(Default = 1)
1 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #1
2 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #2
3 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #3
4 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #4
5 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #5
6 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #6
7 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #7
8 = Stay Mode Entry Delay will Beep Keypad #8
Armed Zone Entry Delay Times
P144E
1-16E
Armed Zone Entry Delay Times - Value 0-9999 seconds
Page 75
(Default Zone #1,2,3 = 20 Seconds)
P145E
1-16E
Stay Mode Entry Delay Times
Stay Mode Entry Delay Times - Value 0-9999 seconds
Page 75
(Default Zones # 1-4 = 20 Seconds, Zones # 5-16 = 0)
P146E
1-16E
Zone Re-trigger Count
Zone Re-Trigger Count - Value 0-15 (Maximum number of times a zone can re-trigger
(Default = 3)
Page 75
during armed state. 0=Unlimited Triggers)
Zone Alarm 4+2 Reporting Codes
P147E
1-16E
Zone Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
P148E
1-16E
Zone Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
P149E
1-16E
Zone Near Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
P150E
1-16E
Zone Near Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
P151E
1-16E
Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
P152E
1-16E
Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
P155E
1-16E
Zone Bypass Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
P156E
1-16E
Zone Bypass Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
Zone Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Codes
Zone Near Alarm 4+2 Reporting Codes
Zone Near Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Codes
Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm 4+2 Reporting Codes
Zone Intrusion Verified Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Codes
Zone Bypass Alarm 4+2 Reporting Codes
Zone Bypass 4+2 Restore Reporting Codes
(See Page 110 for zone alarm SIA reporting codes)
Zone Alarm Contact ID Reporting Codes
P157E
1-16E
Zone Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code - (Default = 130)
Page 75
P158E
1-16E
Zone Near Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code - (Default = 138)
Page 75
P159E
1-16E
Zone Confirmed Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code - (Default = 139)
Page 75
P160E
1-16E
Zone Alarm Voice Message Number - Value-0-99 (Default = 1)
P161E
1-16E
Armed Entry Delay to Outputs
Zone Near Alarm Contact ID Reporting Codes
Zone Confirmed Alarm Contact ID Reporting Codes
Zone Alarm Voice Message Number
Page 75
Armed Entry Delay to Outputs
(Default = All Off)
Page 75
1 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #1
2 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #2
3 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #3
4 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #4
5 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #5
6 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #6
7 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #7
8 = Armed Zone Entry Delay to output #8
105
Stay Mode Entry Delay to Outputs
P162E
1-16E
Page 76
Stay Mode Entry Delay Beeps to Outputs
(Default = All Off)
1 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #1
2 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #2
3 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #3
4 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #4
5 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #5
6 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #6
7 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #7
8 = Stay Mode Entry Delay to output #8
Sensor-Watch Timer
Page 76
P163E
1-16E
Sensor-Watch Timer - 0-9999 Minutes (Default = 7200 minutes [120 Hours])
P164E
1-16E
Learn Radio Zone Codes
P165E
1-16E
Delete a Specific Radio Zone Code
P166E
0E
This will find the zone # of any Radio Zone code stored in the panel
Enrolling Radio Zone Codes
Page 76
Delete a Specific Radio Zone Code
Page 76
Find Radio Zone memory Location
Only press 0E when using LED Keypad.
P167E
1-16E
Zone Near Alarm to Outputs
Page 76
Zone Near Alarm to Outputs
(Default = All Off)
Page 76
1 = Zone Near Alarm to output #1
2 = Zone Near Alarm to output #2
3 = Zone Near Alarm to output #3
4 = Zone Near Alarm to output #4
5 = Zone Near Alarm to output #5
6 = Zone Near Alarm to output #6
7 = Zone Near Alarm to output #7
8 = Zone Near Alarm to output #8
Zone Confirmed Alarm to Outputs
P168E
1-16E
Page 77
Zone Confirmed Alarm to Outputs
(Default = All Off)
1 = Zone Confirmed Alarm to output #1
2 = Zone Confirmed Alarm to output #2
3 = Zone Confirmed Alarm to output #3
4 = Zone Confirmed Alarm to output #4
5 = Zone Confirmed Alarm to output #5
6 = Zone Confirmed Alarm to output #6
7 = Zone Confirmed Alarm to output #7
8 = Zone Confirmed Alarm to output #8
TIME ZONES
P170E
1-8E
Holidays 1-8 Days - Value = DDMMYY
P171E
1-8E
Time Zones 1-8 Days
P172E
P173E
1-8E
1-8E
Time Zones 1-8 Start Time - Value 0000-2359 (Default = 0000)
Time Zones 1-8 End Time - Value 0000-2359 (Default = 0000)
P174E
1-8E
Time Zone 1-8 Options
(Default = All Off)
(Default = All Off)
Programming Holidays
Page 77
Programming Time Zone Days
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
8 = Invert
Page 77
Programming Time Zone Start & End Times
Page 77
Page 77
Time Zone Options
Page 77
1 = Ignore Holidays
2-8 = Spare
106
DIALLER
P175E
1E
Dialler Programming Options
Page 78
Dialler options
(Default = 1,2,7)
1 = Dialler is Enabled
2 = Fax Defeat
3 = Disable Telephone Line Monitoring
4 = DTMF or Pulse Dial (For DTMF, 4&5 must both be OFF)
5 = DTMF or Reverse Pulse Dial (For DTMF, 4&5 must both be OFF)
6 = Send long DTMF tones during dialing
7 = Auto Detect Modem Mode
8 = Bell 103 or V21
Dialler Programming Options 2
P175E
2E
Page 78
Dialler options 2
(Default = 1)
1 = Step number on each call
2 = Upload/Download use callback
3 = Upload/Download only if disarmed
4 = Test calls only if armed
5 = Test Time Period is in days
6 = Hold line open following Domestic/Voice report for DTMF control
7 = First to Open Last to Close Reporting
8 = Answer After 1 ring for Two Way Voice Call-back Mode
Auto-Answer Ring Count
P175E
3E
Auto-Answer Ring Count - Value 0-99 (Default = 8)
P175E
4E
Test Call Start Time - Value 0000-2359 (Default = 245)
P175E
5E
Test Time Call Period - Value 0-255 Hours: 0 = No Test (Default = 168)
P175E
6E
Keypad Listen-in Options
P175E
7E
Output # 1 Listen-in Options
(Default = 1,2,3,4,5,6,7)
Page 79
Test Call Start Time
Page 79
Test Call Time Period
Page 79
Keypad Listen-in Options
Page 80
1 = Enabled During Dialling in Disarm State only
2 = Enabled During Dialling in Armed State only
3 = Enabled During Dialling in Stay Mode State only
4 = Enabled Throughout the call in Disarm State only
5 = Enabled Throughout the call in Armed State only
6 = Enabled Throughout the call in Stay Mode State only
7 = Listen-in Enabled when the panel answers a call
8 = Enabled at All Times
Output # 1 Listen-in Options
(Default = All Off)
Page 80
1 = Enabled During Dialling in Disarm State only
2 = Enabled During Dialling in Armed State only
3 = Enabled During Dialling in Stay Mode State only
4 = Enabled Throughout the call in Disarm State only
5 = Enabled Throughout the call in Armed State only
6 = Enabled Throughout the call in Stay Mode State only
7 = Listen-in Enabled when the panel answers a call
8 = Enabled at All Times
Dialling Pre-fix Number
P175E
8E
Dialling Pre-fix Number - Value 1-16 Digits (Default = 0)
Page 80
P175E
9E
“Panic” Alarm CID Reporting Code - (Default=120)
Page 80
P175E
10E
“Fire” Alarm CID Reporting Code - (Default=110)
Page 80
P175E
11E
“Medical” Alarm CID Reporting Code - (Default=100)
Page 80
P175E
12E
Output Command Control code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999) (Default = 0)
Page 81
P175E
13E
Microphone Command Control code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999) (Default = 0)
Page 81
P175E
14E
Voice/Domestic Acknowledge Code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999) (Default = 0)
Page 81
P175E
15E
Force Test Call Code - Value 1-4 digit code (1-9999) (Default = 0, Feature disabled)
“Panic” Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code
“Fire” Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code
“Medical” Alarm Contact ID Reporting Code
Output “Command Control” Code Number
Microphone On/Off “Command Control” Code Number
Dialler Acknowledge Code
107
Force Test Call Code
Page 81
Programming Voice Board Messages
P176E
P176E
P176E
P176E
P176E
P176E
P176E
P176E
P176E
P176E
P176E
1E
2E
3E
4E
5E
6E
7E
8E
9E
10E
11E
Keypad or Radio “Panic” Alarm Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Fire” Alarm Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Medical” Alarm Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Mains Failure” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Mains Restore” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Battery Low” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Battery Restored” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Tamper” (Zone/Radio/System) Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Duress Alarm” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Latchkey Disarm” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
“Manual Test Initiated” Voice Message Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 0)
Page 81
Page 81
Page 81
Page 81
Page 81
Page 82
Page 82
Page 82
Page 82
Page 82
Page 82
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
Programming Telephone Numbers
P181E
1-8E
Programming Telephone Numbers - Value 1-16 Digits (Default = 0)
Page 82
P182E
1-8E
Telephone Number Reporting Formats
Page 82
Telephone Number Reporting Formats
(Default = 1)
1 = Contact ID
2 = Domestic Dial
3 = Pager
4 = Speech Dialler
5 = 4+2 10pps (Handshake 1400/ Tone 1900)
6 = 4+2 10pps (Handshake 2300/ Tone 1800)
7 = 4+2 20pps (Handshake 1400/ Tone 1900)
8 = 4+2 20pps (Handshake 2300/ Tone 1800)
9 = 4+2 DTMF (with Checksum)
10 = SIA Format
11 = SIA SlowFormat
Telephone Number Reporting Options
P183E
1-8E
Page 83
Telephone Number Reporting Options
(Default = 1,2)
1 = Stop Dialling if Kissed off
2 = Monitor Call Progress
3 = Blind Dial
4 = Use Group Numbers for Contact ID Reporting
5 = Stay On-line after Alarm report for two way voice
6 = Auto Kiss-off for Voice/Domestic Reporting
7 = Use the Dialling Pre-fix
8 = Is to be used as the “Call-back” Number
Maximum Dial Attempts per Telephone Number
P184E
1-8E
Maximum Dial Attempts per Telephone Number - Value 0-99 (Default = 8)
Page 84
P186E
1-8E
Dialler Options A
Page 84
Dialler Reporting Options A
(Default = All On)
P187E
1-8E
Dialler Options B
(Default = All On)
P188E
1-8E
Dialler Options C
(Default = 1,8)
1 = Report Mains Failure
2 = Report Battery low
3 = Report Radio Battery Low
4 = Report Line Fail
5 = Report System Tamper
6 = Report Keypad Tamper
7 = Report Zone Tamper
8 = Report Radio Zone Tamper
1 = Report Duress Alarm
2 = Report Supervised Radio Alarm
3 = Report Zone Sensor-watch Alarm
4 = Report Manual Panic Alarm
5 = Report Manual Fire Alarm
6 = Report Manual Medical Alarm
7 = Report Radio Pendant Panic Alarm
8 = Report Zone Bypasses
Dialler Reporting Options B
Page 85
Dialler Reporting Options C
1 = Report Arm/Disarm
2 = Report Stay Mode Arm/Disarm
3 = Report Disarm only after an Activation
4 = Report Stay Mode Disarm only after an Activation
5 = Report Stay Mode Zone Alarms
6 = Report Access to Program Mode
7 = Report 24 Hour Alarms when set to Domestic/Voice mode
8 = Report Zone Restores
108
Page 86
Dialler Reporting Options D
P189E
1-8E
Dialler Options D
(Default = 3,4,5
P192E
1-2E
Page 86
1 = Report Latchkey Disarm
2 = Report Delinquent
3 = Report Tests
4 = Report Fuse Failure
5 = Report Output 1 or 2 Fail
6 = Report RTC Time changed
7 = Report Keypad Buss Trouble
8 = Report RF Interference (Jamming) Detected
Divert Area Events
Page 86
Divert Area Events
(1=Area A) (Default = All Off)
(2=Area B)
1 = Dial on away arm
2 = Dial on away disarm
3 = Dial on stay arm
4 = Dial on stay disarm
5 = Dial if Key-switch activation
6 = Dial if Time zone activation
7 = Dial if DTMF or PC activation
8 = Dial if keypad “ARM” or “STAY” single button activation
Divert Number Options
P193E
1-2E
(1=Divert on) (Default = All Off)
(2=Divert off)
P194E
1-2E
Page 87
Divert Numbers Options
1 = Spare
2 = Spare
3 = Blind Dial
4 = Spare
5 = Spare
6 = Spare
7 = Use the Dialling Pre-fix
8 = Spare
Divert Numbers
Page 87
Divert Numbers - Value 1-16 Digits (Default = 0)
(1=Divert on)
(2=Divert off)
MISCELLANEOUS 4+2 PROGRAM OPTIONS
Mains & Battery 4+2 Reporting Codes
P195E
P195E
P195E
P195E
1E
2E
3E
4E
Mains Failure 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Mains Failure restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Low Battery 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Low Battery Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
Page 88
Page 88
Page 88
P195E
P195E
5E
6E
4+2 Alarm Code for System Tamper - Two digit value from 00-FF
4+2 Alarm Code for System Tamper Restore - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
Page 88
P195E
P195E
7E
8E
4+2 Code for Remote Arming (Full Arm or Stay Mode Arm)- Two digit value from 00-FF
4+2 Code for Remote Disarm - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 88
Page 88
P195E
9E
4+2 Duress Alarm Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
P195E
10E
4+2 Automatic Test Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
P195E
11E
4+2 Arm by “Arm” Button Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
P195E
12E
4+2 Stay Mode Arming Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
P195E
13E
4+2 Disarm by Arm or Stay Button - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
P195E
P195E
14E
15E
4+2 Arm by “Key-switch” Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
4+2 Disarm by “Key-switch” Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
Page 89
P195E
16E
4+2 Time Zone Arm Failure - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
System Tamper 4+2 Reporting Codes
Remote Arm/Disarm 4+2 Reporting Codes
Duress Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code
Automatic Test 4+2 Reporting Code
Armed by “Arm” Button 4+2 Reporting Code
Stay Mode Arming 4+2 Reporting Code
Disarmed by “Arm” or “Stay” Button 4+2 Reporting Code
Armed/Disarmed by “Key-switch” 4+2 Reporting Code
“Time Zone Arm Failure” 4+2 Reporting Code
109
Keypad “Panic” Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code
P195E
17E
Keypad Panic Alarm 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
P195E
18E
Keypad Panic Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 89
P195E
19E
Keypad Fire Alarm 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 90
P195E
20E
Keypad Fire Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 90
P195E
21E
Keypad Medical Alarm 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 90
P195E
22E
Keypad Medical Alarm Restore 4+2 Code - Two digit value from 00-FF
Page 90
Keypad “Panic” Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Code
Keypad “Fire” Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code
Keypad “Fire” Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Code
Keypad “Medical” Alarm 4+2 Reporting Code
Keypad “Medical” Alarm 4+2 Restore Reporting Code
SIA ALARM REPORT CODES
(SIA event codes are entered by programming a value from the chart on Page 115. For example, to send the SIA “Panic
Alarm” code when a keypad panic is generated you must enter a value of “6” at location P197E1E)
Zone Alarm SIA Reporting Codes
P196E
1-16E
Zone Alarm SIA Reporting Code - (Default value = 1, Alarm Event Code BA)
Page 90
P197E
1E
“Panic” Alarm SIA Reporting Code - (Default value = 6, Panic Alarm Event Code PA)
Page 90
P197E
2E
“Fire” Alarm SIA Reporting Code - (Default value = 4, Fire Alarm Event Code FA)
Page 90
P197E
3E
“Medical” Alarm SIA Reporting Code - (Default value = 5, Medical Alarm Event Code MA)
Page 90
“Panic” Alarm SIA Reporting Code
“Fire” Alarm SIA Reporting Code
“Medical” Alarm SIA Reporting Code
PANEL DIAGNOSTIC DEFAULT OPTIONS
Display Panel Software Version Number
Page 90
P200E
1E
Display the Panel Software Version Number
P200E
2E
Display Keypad Address Number
P200E
3E
Display Areas Assigned to this Keypad
P200E
4E
Display Active Time Zones
P200E
5E
Display Battery Voltage
P200E
6E
Walk Test Mode
P200E
7E
Write to EEPROM (DTU) Board
P200E
8E
Read from EEPROM (DTU) Board
Page 91
P200E
9E
Restore User/Installer Codes & Telephone #’s to Default Values
Page 92
P200E
10E
Restore All Factory Defaults
Page 92
P200E
11E
Clear Alarm Memory Buffer
P200E
12E
Initiate a Call to the Call-back
Display Keypad Address Number
Page 90
Display Areas Assigned to this Keypad
Page 90
Display Active Time Zones
Page 90
Display Battery Voltage
Page 90
Walk Test Mode
Page 91
Write to EEPROM (DTU) Board
Page 91
Read from EEPROM (DTU) Board
Restore User & Installer Codes plus Telephone Numbers to Defaults
Restore All Factory Defaults
Clear Alarm Memory Buffer
Page 92
Initiate a Call to the Call-back
Page 92
110
Read RSSI from Pendants and Wireless Zones
P200E
14E
Read RSSI from Pendants and Wireless Zones
111
Page 92
‘S SERIES’ LED KEYPAD
READY
he
n
y
PROGRAM
u
CONTROL
are
o
BYPASS
W
ha
AC FAIL
BATTERY LOW
LINE
‘S series’
MEMORY
TROUBLE
LED KEYPAD INDICATIONS
MEMORY
ARM
BYPASS
STAY
CONTROL
PROGRAM
ENTER
‘S series’ LED KEYPAD INDICATIONS
112
‘S series’ QUICK START GUIDE
The default settings of this panel have been chosen to allow the system to be up and running with a minimum of programming.
Because of this there are normally only a handful of program addresses that need to be changed to get the
system fully functional.
As a guide to getting the system up and running as quickly as possible we have summarised the most commonly used
addresses for you below.
CODES:
P1E
1-100E Code 1 is P1E1E and is defaulted to “123”. Code 2 is P1E2E, etc up to P1E100E for code
100.
ENABLE DIALLER:
P175E 1E
By default the Dialler is turned Off. To turn On the dialler you must turn on Option 1 at address
P175E1E.
TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
P181E 1-8E
Telephone Number 1 is P181E1E and can be up to 16 digits long. Number 2 is P182E2E, etc up
to P181E8E for Phone number 8.
TELEPHONE FORMAT:
P182E 1-8E
There are 9 different reporting formats that can be selected for each telephone number. The
formats are listed on page 108.
ACCOUNT CODE:
P62E 1-2E
Area “A” Account code is P62E1E and Area “B” Account code is P62E2E.
ARMED ENTRY DELAYS:
P144E 1-16E Zone 1 entry delay is P144E1E and can be a value of 0-9999 seconds through to Zone 16 entry
delay being at address P144E16E. A value of “0” makes the zone instant.
STAY ENTRY DELAYS:
P145E 1-16E Zone 1 entry delay when armed in “Stay” Mode is P145E1E and can be a value of 0-9999
seconds through to Zone 16 Stay Mode entry delay being at address P145E16E. A value of “0”
makes the zone instant.
ARMED EXIT DELAY:
P60E 1-2E
Area A exit delay is programmed at P60E1E, Area B at P60E2E and can be a value of 0-255
seconds. A value of “0” makes the area arm instantly with no exit delay.
STAY EXIT DELAY:
P61E 1-2E
Area A Stay Mode exit delay is programmed at P61E1E, Area B at P61E2E and can be a value of
0-255 seconds. A value of “0” arms Stay Mode instantly with no exit delay.
113
USER PRIVILEGES CHART
P5E Options:
Option 8: Can force download
Option 7: Learn new radio devices
Option 6: Change DTMF command
Option 5: Change clock
Option 4: Change phone numbers
Option 3: Full access
Option
2: Change others codes
Program
Location Option 1: Change own code
1
2
3
X
X
X
4
P1E
P2E
P3E
P4E
P5E
P7E
P8E
P9E
P18E
P19E
P20E
P21E
P22E
P23E
P25E12E
User codes
P26E (all)
P170E
Time/Date and Daylight Savings
Change Holidays
P63E
Area A & B Command Code
P164E
P165E
P166E
Learn radio zone
Delete radio zone
Find radio zone
P175E3E
P175E4E
P175E5E
P175E8E
P175E12E
P175E13E
P175E14E
P175E15E
Auto-answer rings
Time to first test call
Test call period
Dial prefix
Output DTMF command control code
Microphone DTMF command control code
Voice/Domestic DTMF acknowledge code
Remote test initiate DTMF code
X
X
X
X
P181E
P194E
Telephone numbers
Divert telephone numbers
X
X
P200E1E
P200E2E
P200E3E
P200E4E
P200E5E
P200E6E
P200E12E
Display panel version #
Display keypad address
Areas assigned to this keypad
Display active time zones
Display battery voltage
Enter walk test mode
Initiate call back
User type
User areas
User access
User privileges
User pendant type
User radio privileges
User time zones
Learn radio user
Delete radio user
Find radio user
Learn access Tag/Card user
Delete access Tag/Card user
Find access Tag/Card user
User options (hide user codes to installer)
5
6
7
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
114
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TELECOM INTERFACE
The dialler facility on this controller has been designed to provide optimum flexibility in the way in which alarm events
are reported. This flexibility includes options for reporting to a central monitoring station using Contact ID format, a
Domestic reporting option using alternating siren tones, a format for reporting alarms to an alpha numeric pager and a
powerful Speech Dialler.
In accordance with the statutory requirements of the Telepermit standards we must bring the following points to your
attention; A readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated into the 230V fixed wiring. In the event of any
problem with this device, the by-pass switch should be operated. The user is to then arrange with the installer of the
device to make the necessary repairs. Should the matter be reported to Telecom as a wiring fault, and the fault be
proven to be due to the alarm panel, a call out charge will be incurred.
Should the control panel require relocation the Telecom connection must be disconnected before the power is
disconnected. Similarly when reconnecting the dialler, it is necessary to power up the panel before connecting the
dialler to the Telecom Network.
Connection to the Telecom network should be made in accordance with Access Standards Newsletter #65 dated
November 1993. This connection is to be readily accessible to allow disconnection in the event of a fault. An example
of this connection method is shown below.
NOTE: The telephone line must not enter the cabinet through the same cable entry hole as any 230 volt mains cables. A
separate cable entry must be used for 230 volt cabling
When using one of the knock-outs around the side of the cabinet for supply entry, a suitable bushing must be used
where the supply cables pass through a knock-out.
The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of this there may be circumstances where this
device does not give its optimum performance. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the line with a
standard Telepermitted telephone, and do not report a fault unless the telephone performance is impaired.
This automatic dialling equipment shall not be set up to make calls to the
Emergency Number 000
115
Contact ID Reporting Code Summary
In addition to the programmable Contact ID Event Code assignments defined at P157E, P158E, P159E, P175E (10E-12E) there are a
number of fixed event codes. The programmable and fixed event codes are all listed in the table below. Associated with the fixed and
programmable event codes, there are a number of extension codes, that are also listed below. The list of extension codes is for your
reference only and can not be changed in programming.
Event Type
Event Code
Extension
Comment
System Tamper
137
000
Panel & Sat Tamper etc
Zone Alarm (wired or wireless)
Zone Tamper - Low (short circuit)
Zone Tamper - High (open circuit)
Zone Tamper - Radio Zone
Zone Near Alarm
Zone Confirmed Alarm
Radio PIR / Reed Switch Battery Low
Radio PIR Supervised Alarm
Sensor-watch Alarm
Zone Excludes
130
383
383
383
138
139
384
381
391
570
001 to 016
001 to 008
009 to 016
001 to 016
001 to 016
001 to 016
001 to 016
001 to 016
001 to 016
001 to 016
Alarm on Zone 1-16
Zone Input 1-8 short circuit
Zone Input 1-8 open circuit
Radio Zone 1-16
Zone Input 1-16
Zone Input 1-16
Radio Zone 1-16
Supervised Radio Zone 1-16
Zone 1-16
Exclude Zone 1-16
Keypad Panic (or 1&3)
Radio-Key Panic
Keypad Fire (4&6)
Keypad Medical (7&9)
Keypad Tamper Switch Alarm
Wrong Code Alarm
120
120
110
100
137
461
001 to 008
021 to 100
001 to 008
001 to 008
101 to 108
001 to 008
Panic at keypad #1-8
Panic by Radio User # 21-100
Fire Alarm at keypad #1-8
Medical Alarm at keypad #1-8
Keypad 1-8 Tamper Switch Activated
4 Incorrect code entries at KP # 1-8
Arm/Disarm by "ARM key (Quick Arm)
Arm/Disarm by user code
Arm/Disarm by Radio-key
Arm/Disarm by Key-switch
Arm/Disarm by DTMF or Up/Download
Arm/Disarm by Time-Zone
Latchkey Disarm
Fail to Arm on Time-Zone
Delinquency Alarm
408
401
400
409
409
407
403
642
455
454
000
001 to 100
021 to 100
000
001
000
000
001 to 100
000
000
Arm/Disarm by single button
Arm/Disarm by User #1-100
Arm/Disarm by Radio User #21-100
Key-switch # 1 Arm/Disarm
Key-switch # 2 Arm/Disarm
Remote Arm/Disarm
Time-Zone Arm/Disarm
Latchkey User Disarm
Auto Arm fail
System not Armed within # days
Stay Mode Arm/Disarm (part set)
Stay Mode Arm/Disarm (part set)
Stay Mode Arm/Disarm by Key-switch
Stay Mode Arm/Disarm by Key-switch
441
441
442
442
000
001 to 100
000
001
Arm by “Stay” Button
Stay Mode Arm by User # 1-100
Stay Mode Arm by Key-switch # 1
Stay Mode Arm by Key-switch # 2
Mains Fail
System Battery Low
Checksum Fail (Corrupt EEPROM Data)
Fuse Fail
Radio-key Battery Low
Radio-PIR / Reed Switch Battery Low
301
302
303
312
384
384
000
000
001-008
000
021 to 100
001 to 016
Mains (AC) fail
Control Panel Battery low
Checksum block error
Fuse 1 or 2 Fail
Radio-key User #21-100 low batt.
Radio Zone 1-16
Automatic TEST Calls
Manual TEST Calls
602
601
000
000
24 hour test
User generated Test Call
Phone Line Failure
351
000
Reported when line is restored
Duress Alarm
121
001 to 008
Duress at Keypad #1-8
Program Mode Entry
Program Mode Exit
627
628
000
000
Program Mode entered
Program Mode exited
Output 1 or 2 Tamper
Time & Date Changed
Keypad Bus Trouble
RF Receiver jam detected
Dialler Failure
323
625
330
344
354
001 or 002
000
001 to 008
000
000
O/P 1 or 2 wires cut.
Time & Date has been changed
Keypad device 1-8 offline
RF Jamming Detected
Failure to get kiss off
Listen-In Request
606
000
Hold line open after alarm
116
SIA Reporting Code Summary
Most of the SIA Event Codes are fixed within the panel but some locations such as zones at P196E (1-16E) and Panic/Fire/Medical at
P197E (1-3E) can have a user defined report code from the table below. To follow are the default SIA reporting codes.
Event Type
Armed, 24 hour & Near Zone Alarms (programmable P196E)
Zone Verified Alarm Activated
Zone Bypassed
Zone Tamper Activated
Sensor-Watch Fail
Radio Zone Supervise Fail
Pendant or Radio Zone Low Battery
Keypad or Pendant Panic Alarm (programmable P197E1E)
Keypad Fire Alarm (programmable P197E2E)
Medical Alarm (programmable P197E3E)
Duress Alarm
Panel or Keypad Tamper Switch Activated
Panel Battery Low
Panel AC Fail
Output Tamper Alarm (O/P 1 & 2 only)
12V Output (fuse) Failure
Phone Line Fail
Automatic Test Message
Manual Test Call
Area Delinquency Alarm
Excessive Code Attempts Alarm
Armed by User, Pendant, ARM button, DTMF or PC
Area Armed by Key-Switch
Area Armed by Time Zone
Stay Mode Armed by User, Pendant, KS, STAY Button
Fail to Arm by Time-Zone
Program Mode Entry/Exit
Checksum Fail (Corrupt EEPROM Data)
Time Changed
Keypad Bus Trouble
Dialler Failure (No Kiss off)
RF Interference (jamming) Detected
Listen-In Request
SIA Alarm Code
BA
BV
BB
BT
NA
BZ
XT
PA
FA
MA
HA
TA
YT
AT
YA
YP
LT
RP
RX
CD
JA
CL
CS
CA
CG
CI
LB
YF
JT
IA
YC
XQ
LF
SIA Restore Code
BH
BH
BU
BJ
NS
BR
XR
PH
FH
MH
HH
TR
YR
AR
YH
YQ
LR
CT
JP
OP
OS
OA
OG
LX
IR
XH
CHART FOR THE PROGRAMMABLE SIA EVENT CODES
Event
Description
Program
Number
Alarm
Restore
Bypass
Un-Bypass
Trouble
Trouble
Restore
Near
Alarm
Verified
Alarm
Burglary
1
BA
BH
BB
BU
BT
BJ
BA
BV
Un-typed Alarm
2
UA
UH
UB
UU
UT
UJ
-
-
Hold-up
3
HA
HH
HB
HU
HT
HJ
-
-
Fire
4
FA
FH
FB
FU
FT
FJ
FA
FM
Medical
5
MA
MH
MB
MU
MT
MJ
-
-
Panic
6
PA
PH
PB
PU
PT
PJ
-
-
Emergency
7
QA
QH
QB
QU
QT
QJ
-
-
Gas
8
GA
GH
GB
GU
GT
GJ
-
-
Sprinkler
9
SA
SH
SB
SU
ST
SJ
-
-
Water
10
WA
WH
WB
WU
WT
WJ
-
-
Heat
11
KA
KH
KB
KU
KT
KJ
-
-
Freeze
12
ZA
ZH
ZB
ZU
ZT
ZJ
-
-
Equipment
13
IA
IR
-
-
-
-
-
-
Equip. Tamper
14
TA
TH
TB
TU
TT
TJ
-
-
When you program one of the numbers in column 2 above at any of the addresses at P196E or P197E then all of the SIA codes associated with that event type will automatically be loaded, eg if Zone 10 (P196E10E) was programmed with a “4”, then when zone 10 activates it will send the fire alarm (FA) and the fire alarm restore (FH) and if zone 10 was bypassed it will send the fire bypass (FB) and the
fire un-bypass (FU). See page 90 for more details.
117
Setting up and Operation of the Full Duplex Two
Way Voice Function
From panel software version V9.05 there have been some new options added to allow for a Full Duplex Two Way Voice
connection following the successful reporting of an alarm event to monitoring. This new two way voice mode applies to
alarm reports in either CID (Contact ID) or SIA. For the new feature to work the panel must have a full duplex voice board
fitted.
There are two new options that determine whether two way voice mode will be active after an alarm and whether the
two way voice connection will be direct on-line (eg staying on-line after reporting the alarm and not hanging-up), or
require a call-back whereby the monitoring room operator must call the panel after receiving the alarm report.
These new options are;
P175E2E option 8
P183E option 5
For direct on-line two way voice option 5 at P183E must be turned on (the setting at P175E2E is irrelevant)
For call-back two way voice option 5 at P183E must be turned off and option 8 at P175E2E must be turned on.
When direct on-line mode is selected the panel will send a CID “606” or a SIA “LF” event code to tell the monitoring receiver that a listen-in request has been made. This tells the receiver to hold the line open and hand the call over to a telephone so the operator can listen or talk directly to the site where the panel is installed.
If call-back mode is selected the panel will report the alarm in the normal way then hang-up but it will answer any incoming calls after 1 ring allowing the monitoring room to call the panel quickly and easily.
There is also an additional feature at P37E option 4 that if selected (option 4 turned on) will disable the output/s while
two way voice is active. This allows internal audible devices to be silenced during the two way voice session. Any output/s
disabled during two way voice by this option will return to normal as soon as the dialler hangs up terminating the two
way voice mode. If the output should still be on when two way voice is terminated it will return to that state. Also in the
case of outputs 1 & 2 only, if they are selected to be modulated outputs (P37E option 1 on) this will also disable the outputs during two way voice mode.
OPERATING MODE
Regardless of whether the mode is set to direct on-line or call-back, once two way voice mode is active the panel will generate a short beep every 5 seconds for a 30 second period. If nothing happens and the 30 second timer expires the panel
will hang-up.
If however the DTMF code programmed at P175E14E is entered before the 30 second timer expires (eg if a code of 1234
was programmed at P175E14E then the operator must enter 1-2-3-4-# at their telephone). The short beeps will stop and
the two way voice channel will remain open for a period of 3 minutes (if no code is programmed at P175E14E then pressing the # button is all that is needed).
After 2 minutes and 30 seconds the short beeps will start again. The operator must repeat the process above to keep the
panel on-line for a further 3 minutes otherwise the panel will hang-up when the 3 minutes expire.
If the operator wishes to terminate the two way voice connection they should enter in 0-0-0-# on their telephone which
will tell the panel to hang-up.
If the panel is set for two way voice call-back operation it will answer any in-coming call on the first ring for a period of 10
minutes from reporting the alarm event and hanging up. If the DTMF code at P175E14E (as described above) is not entered within 30 seconds and the panel hangs-up, the panel will still answer any new calls on the first ring unless it has
been longer than 10 minutes since the original alarm was transmitted. As soon as the panel receives the correct DTMF
acknowledge code the auto-answer feature (answering on the 1st ring) will be reset.
118
119